HP 4600, 4650 color LaserJet printer Service Manual
Below you will find brief information for color LaserJet printer 4600, color LaserJet printer 4650. These printers are designed for high-volume printing and feature a wide range of paper handling options. They also offer a variety of connectivity options, including parallel, USB, and network connections. They also have a wide range of features, including PowerSave, an embedded Web server, and a variety of diagnostics tools.
advertisement
hp color LaserJet
4600/4650 printers
service
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer
Service Manual
Copyright
© 2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be held liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Part number: Q3668-90901
Edition 2, 05/2004
Trademarks
Adobe ® , Adobe Photoshop ® , PostScript ® , and the Acrobat logo ® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries/regions.
Corel ® is a trademark of the Corel
Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Trovalds.
Microsoft ® , Windows ® , and Windows NT ® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
PANTONE ® Pantone, Inc's check-standard trademark for color.
UNIX ® is a registered trademark of the
Open Group.
ENERGY STAR ® is a U.S. registered service mark of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
Safety Information
WARNING!
Potential Shock Hazard
Always follow basic safety precautions when using this product to reduce the risk of injury from fire or electric shock.
Table of contents
ENWW
1 Product information
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information .................................27
2 Service approach
iii
iv
3 Installation and configuration
Auxiliary connection configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .............................55
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB, HP
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected ....................69
ENWW
ENWW
4 Maintenance
Installing memory and font DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ............................93
5 Theory of operation
v
vi
6 Removal and replacement
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .........................175
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly .......................................230
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper sensor ..............................233
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper detection switch ...............234
7 Troubleshooting
ENWW
ENWW
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ................................246
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ................................262
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ....................................282
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ....................................300
Print-quality troubleshooting tools (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ...........................335
vii
viii
Print the RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ...................................381
Print the CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) .....................................382
ENWW
8 Parts and diagrams
Index
ENWW
ix
x
ENWW
List of tables
ENWW
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items ......................................81
Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor ......................................113
Cassette paper size detection (2 x 500-sheet feeder) ..................................158
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items ....................................163
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ...............246
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ...............262
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ..................283
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ..................300
Error messages and associated jam locations .............................................323
Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3/4 (2 x 500-sheet paper feeder) ..............329
Causes for wrinkled or folded media (part one: paper-path entrance) .........333
Causes for wrinkled or folded paper (part two: paper-path exit) ..................334
Causes for a completely blank image ...........................................................346
Causes for an all black or solid colored image .............................................346
Causes for dirt on the back of the paper .......................................................347
Causes for dirt on the front of the paper .......................................................347
xi
xii
Technical support Web sites and related documentation .............................435
500-sheet paper feeder assembly ................................................................475
500-sheet paper feeder internal components ...............................................477
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2) .......................................481
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2) .......................................483
2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly ......................................485
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly .....................................487
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly .....................................489
ENWW
List of figures
ENWW
Front view, HP Color LaserJet 4600 models ....................................................9
Back view, HP Color LaserJet 4600 models .....................................................9
Front view, HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ..................................................10
Back view, HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ...................................................10
HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer space requirements ...............................14
Parallel port connection (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ............................54
Parallel port connection (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ............................54
Peer to peer connection (direct to network) ....................................................57
ETB total page count according to average job length ...................................83
Motors and fans (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers) ..........................112
Fan and environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .................112
xiii
xiv
Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning ...........................139
Cassette paper-size detection switches .......................................................148
Overhead transparency detection .................................................................149
500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation ......................................154
2 x 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed operation ..........................................157
Cassette paper size detection switches (2 x 500-sheet feeder) ...................158
Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison ...............................................161
Removing and replacing the DC controller shield ........................................177
Remove the paper pickup unit (1 of 2) ..........................................................178
Remove the paper pickup unit (2 of 2) ..........................................................178
Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA (1 of 2) ............................................179
Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA (2 of 2) ............................................179
Remove the cassette (tray 2) pickup rollers .................................................180
Replace the cassette (tray 2) pickup rollers ..................................................180
Remove the paper pickup drive unit .............................................................181
Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad (1 of 2) .....182
Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad (2 of 2) .....182
Remove the color registration detection unit (1 of 2) ....................................184
Remove the color registration detection unit (2 of 2) ....................................184
Remove the environment sensor ..................................................................185
Remove the developing disengaging rod .....................................................186
Reinstall the developing disengaging rod (1 of 2) ........................................186
Reinstall the developing disengaging rod (2 of 2) ........................................187
Remove the drum home-position sensors ....................................................189
ENWW
ENWW
Remove the drum drive motors (cyan motor is shown) ................................191
Remove the memory-tag antenna PCA (cyan is shown) ..............................191
Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly .................................192
Remove the DC controller PCA ....................................................................193
Remove the memory controller PCA ............................................................194
Remove the cassette paper-size-detection switch .......................................195
Remove the formatter (HP Color LaserJet 4600 model is shown) ...............196
Remove the low-voltage power supply .........................................................197
Remove the low-voltage power on the rear ..................................................198
Remove the low-voltage power supply on the left side ................................198
Remove the power-supply fan (1 of 2; HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ....199
Remove the power-supply fan (2 of 2; HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ....200
Remove the formatter case (1 of 2) ..............................................................201
Remove the formatter case (2 of 2) ..............................................................202
Disconnect the laser/scanner connectors and formatter ribbon cable .........203
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate (1 of 2) .............................................203
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate (2 of 2) .............................................204
Remove the left side laser/scanner retaining bar (2 of 2, rear of printer) .....205
Remove the right side laser/scanner retaining bar (2 of 2, rear of printer) ...206
Remove the laser/scanner assemblies .........................................................207
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA ...............................................208
Align the high-voltage power supply PCA .....................................................209
Remove the toner level detection PCA .........................................................210
Remove the high-voltage contact blocks (cyan is shown) ............................211
Remove the fuser power supply PCA (1 of 2) ..............................................213
Remove the fuser power supply PCA (2 of 2) ..............................................214
Remove the fuser delivery sensor ................................................................218
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder top plate .............................................222
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder drive unit (1 of 2, top view) ................223
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder drive unit (2 of 2, side view) ...............223
Align the 500-sheet paper feeder cam and gear ..........................................224
Remove the 500-sheet paper-feeder PCA ...................................................225
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover ....................................226
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover (1 of 2) ........................227
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover (2 of 2) ........................227
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover ......................................228
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover ....................................229
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (1 of 2) ................231
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (2 of 2) ................231
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor (1 of 2) .....................232
xv
xvi
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor (2 of 2) .....................232
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder driver PCA ...................................235
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers ................................236
Jam locations (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer) ...............................321
2 x 500-sheet feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only) .......................322
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map .................................................360
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models menu map .................................................361
Printer configuration page (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ......................374
HP Color LaserJet 4650 model configuration page ......................................375
Supplies status page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 model is shown) ................376
Usage page (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ............................................377
Usage page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ............................................377
File directory page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown) ..................379
PCL font list page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown) ....................380
RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ................................381
CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .............................382
Formatter LED (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ........................................384
Formatter LED (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ........................................385
Door switch and ETB connector ...................................................................386
Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement ..........................................................389
Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor ......................................................393
Sensors on the paper pickup unit (sensors are on the back of the PCA) .....413
Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor ......................................................414
ENWW
ENWW
Location of connectors (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ...........................424
Location of connectors (1 of 2); HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ...............425
Location of connectors (2 of 2); HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ...............426
Connectors (2 x 500-sheet feeder) ...............................................................427
General circuit diagram (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ..........................428
General circuit diagram (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ..........................429
General circuit diagram (500-sheet feeder) ..................................................430
General circuit diagram (2 x 500-sheet feeder) ............................................431
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer major components ..........................442
500-sheet paper feeder assembly ................................................................474
500-sheet paper feeder internal components ...............................................476
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2) .......................................480
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2) .......................................482
2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly ......................................484
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly .....................................486
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly .....................................488
xvii
xviii
ENWW
1
Product information
This chapter contains information about the follow topics.
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information .................................27
ENWW
1
Model configurations
This manual describes the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models, which are referred to collectively as the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers.
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer
The following figures and table show the configuration for the various models of HP Color
LaserJet 4600 Series printer. The HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer and the HP Color LaserJet
4650 printer each come in five models.
Figure 1-1.
HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models
1
2
3
HP Color LaserJet 4600, 4600n, 4600dn, 4650, 4650n, and 4650dn printer
HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printer
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer
Table 1-1. Model configurations
HP LaserJet 4600 models
HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer (model number
C9660A)
The HP CLJ 4600 printer is the base model, which includes 96 megabytes (MB) of synchronous dynamic random access memory
(SDRAM), one 500-sheet input tray.
Callout 1 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer.
2
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-1. Model configurations (continued)
HP Color LaserJet 4600n printer (model number
C9692A)
The HP CLJ 4600n printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect
610n print server (network card) and automatic 2sided printing (duplexing).
Callout 1 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600n
printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4600dn printer (model number C9661A)
HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn printer (model number C9662A)
HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer (model number C9663A)
The HP CLJ 4600dn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect
610n print server (network card), automatic 2sided printing (duplexing), an additional 500sheet feeder, and 10 MB of SDRAM.
Callout 2 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600dn
printer.
The HP CLJ 4600dtn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect
610n print server (network card) and automatic 2sided printing (duplexing), an additional 500sheet feeder, and 10 MB of SDRAM.
Callout 2 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn
printer.
The HP CLJ 4600hdn printer contains all of the features of the base model with an HP Jetdirect
610n print server (network card) and automatic 2sided printing (duplexing), an additional 500sheet feeder, a hard disk, and 160 MB of SDRAM.
Callout 2 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn
printer.
HP LaserJet 4650 models
HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer (model number
Q3668A)
HP Color LaserJet 4650n printer (model number
Q3669A)
The HP CLJ 4650 printer is the base model, which includes 128 megabytes (MB) of dual-datarate (DDR) synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 160
MB of memory, and a 500-sheet input tray.
The printer provides three enhanced input/output
(EIO) slots, wireless connectivity, an auxiliary port, a universal serial bus (USB) connection, and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface
(IEEE-1284-C compliant).
Callout 1 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer.
The HP CLJ 4650n printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect
620n print server (network card).
Callout 1 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650n
printer.
Model configurations
3
Table 1-1. Model configurations (continued)
HP Color LaserJet 4650dn printer (model number Q3670A)
The HP CLJ 4650dn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect
620n print server (network card) and automatic 2sided printing (duplexing).
Callout 1 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650dn
printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn printer (model number Q3671A)
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer (model number Q3672A)
The HP CLJ 4650dtn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect
620n print server (network card), automatic 2sided printing (duplexing), an additional 500sheet feeder.
This model has 256 MB of DDR SDRAM, plus 32
MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 288 MB of memory.
Callout 2 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn
printer.
The HP CLJ 4650hdn printer contains all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect
620n print server (network card), automatic 2sided printing (duplexing), a 2 x 500-sheet feeder, and a hard drive.
This model has 256 MB of DDR SDRAM, plus 32
MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 288 MB of memory.
Callout 3 in Figure 1-1. HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models shows the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn
printer.
4
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Printer features
This printer combines the quality and reliability of HP printing with the following features. For more information about printer features, go to the Web site at
www.hp.com/support/lj4600 or at www.hp.com/support/lj4650 .
Table 1-2. Printer features
Feature
Performance
Memory
User interface
Supported printer personalities
Storage features
Environmental features
Description
● HP Color LaserJet 4600 models: 17 pages per minute (ppm) on letter-sized paper, 16 ppm on A4-sized paper.
● HP Color LaserJet 4650 models: 22 pages per minute (ppm) on letter-sized and A4sized paper.
● Prints on transparencies and glossy paper.
For information about printer memory, see Table
● Graphical display on the control panel.
● Enhanced Help with animated graphics.
● Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies (on networkconnected printers).
● HP CLJ 4650 models: HP LaserJet
Toolbox software to provide printer status and alerts, configure printer settings, view documentation and troubleshooting information, and print internal printer information pages.
● HP PCL 6.
● HP PCL 5c.
● PostScript ® 3 emulation (PS).
● HP CLJ 4650 models: Automatic language switching.
● HP CLJ 4650 models: Portable document format (PDF).
● Job storage (for printers that contain hard disks).
● Fonts and forms.
● Personal identification number (PIN) printing
(for printers that contain hard disks).
● PowerSave setting.
● High content of recyclable components and materials.
●
ENERGY STAR
®
compliant.
ENWW Printer features
5
Table 1-2. Printer features (continued)
Feature
Fonts
Paper handling
Description
● 80 internal fonts are available for both PCL and PostScript emulation.
● 80 printer-matching screen fonts in
TrueType format are available with the software solution.
● Supports forms and fonts on the disk by using HP Web Jetadmin.
● Prints on media from 77 mm x 127 mm (3 inches x 5 inches) up to legal size (216 mm x 355 mm; 8.5 inches x 14 inches).
● HP Color LaserJet 4600 models: Prints on media of weights from 60 g/m 2 to 163 g/m 2
(16 lb to 43 lb).
● HP Color LaserJet 4650 models: Prints on media of weights from 60 g/m 2 to 199 g/m 2
(16 lb to 53 lb).
● Prints on a wide range of media types including glossy, labels, overhead transparencies, and envelopes.
● Accepts multiple gloss levels.
● Includes a 500-sheet input tray (tray 2) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-,
A4-, and A5-size and custom media.
● An Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS
B5-, A4-, and A5-size and custom media
(the tray is standard on HP Color LaserJet
4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printers).
● An optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray
3 and tray 4) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-, 16K-, A4-, A5-, and custom-size media (the tray is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer).
Note
The 2 x 500-sheet feeder is available only for the
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
● Includes built in 2-sided printing on the HP
Color LaserJet 4600dn, 4600dtn, 4600hdn,
4650dn, 4650dtn, and 4650hdn printers.
● Includes a 250-sheet face-down output bin.
6
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-2. Printer features (continued)
Feature
Accessories
Connectivity
Description
● Printer hard disk, which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as job storage (the hard disk is standard on HP Color
LaserJet 4600hdn and 4650hdn printers).
● HP CLJ 4600 models: Dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
● HP CLJ 4650 models: Compact Flash memory.
● Printer stand.
● Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS
B5-, A4-, and A5 and custom-size media
(the feeder is standard on HP Color
LaserJet 4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printers).
● HP CLJ 4650 models: Optional 2 x 500sheet paper feeder (tray 3/4) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-, A4-, and
A5 and custom-size media (the feeder is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4650hdtn printer).
● HP CLJ 4600 models: Fast InfraRed (FIR) pod.
● HP CLJ 4650 models: Two 200-pin DDR
SDRAM slots. One slot is available for adding memory to the printer. DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules.
● Optional enhanced input/output (EIO) network card (the network card is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600n, 4600dn,
4600dtn, 4600hdn, 4650n, 4650dn,
4650dtn, and 4650hdn printers).
● Fast InfraRed (FIR) connection.
● HP Web Jetadmin software.
● Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284 compliant).
● HP CLJ 4650 models: Auxiliary connector.
● HP CLJ 4650 models: USB 1.1 connection.
Note
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models: Both USB and parallel connections are supported, but cannot be used at the same time.
Printer features
7
Table 1-2. Printer features (continued)
Feature
Supplies
Description
● Supplies status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.
● No-shake cartridge design.
● The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation.
● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities
(by using embedded Web server or the printer Status and Alerts).
8
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Printer assemblies
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
Figure 1-2.
Front view, HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Output bin
Printer control panel
Top cover
Front cover (includes tray 1)
Tray 2 (500-sheet standard tray)
Tray 3 (500-sheet paper feeder; optional)
On/off switch
Access to print cartridge, transfer unit, and fuser
Figure 1-3.
Back view, HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Output bin
On/off switch
Tray 3 500-sheet paper feeder (optional)
EIO connections (3 total)
Memory access
Fast InfraRed (FIR) connection
Parallel connection
Power connection
ENWW Printer assemblies
9
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
Figure 1-4.
Note
Front view, HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Output bin
Printer control panel
Top cover
Tray 1
Tray 2
Access to print cartridges, transfer unit, and fuser
On/off switch
Tray 3 and tray 4 (optional)
The optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) and the optional 2 x 500-sheet input tray (tray 3 and tray 4) cannot be installed in the printer at the same time.
Figure 1-5.
Back view, HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Output bin
Auxiliary connector
Parallel connection
On/off switch
EIO connection (3 total)
Memory access
1.1 USB connection
Tray 3 and tray 4 (optional)
10
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Identification, site requirements, and specifications
The following sections describes printer identification, site requirements, and specifications.
Note
Model and serial numbers
The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer. The model number is alphanumeric, such as C9660A for an HP Color LaserJet
4600 printer. The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the printer version, production code, and the production number of the printer.
This manual describes the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer which includes the HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
Figure 1-6.
Model and serial number label
Model Name
HP Color LaserJet 4600
HP Color LaserJet 4650
HP Color LaserJet 4600n
HP Color LaserJet 4650n
HP Color LaserJet 4600dn
HP Color LaserJet 4650dn
HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn
HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn
HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn
Model number
C9660A
Q3668A
C9692A
Q3669A
C9661A
Q3670A
C9662A
Q3671A
C9663A
Q3672A
Power and regulatory label
The identification labels on the rear of the printer also contain power-rating and regulatory information.
ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications
11
CAUTION
Converting the voltage on the printer can damage the printer. Do not use any voltage other than the operating voltage. Any attempt to convert operating voltages will void the product warranty (for example, attempting to change a 110 V printer to a 220 V printer).
Figure 1-7.
Power and regulatory label
Site requirements
The printer must be kept in an appropriate location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory. In particular, be sure that the environment adheres to the specifications listed in this chapter.
The following are recommendations for the printer location and placement.
Make sure that the printer installation location has the following attributes:
● A well-ventilated, dust-free area
● A hard, level surface (with not more than a 2° angle)
● For the HP Color LaserJet 4600, 4600n, and 4600dn, the surface must support at least 37 kg (81 lb)
● For the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn, the surface must support at least
44 kg (97 lb)
● For the HP Color LaserJet 4650, 4650n, and 4650dn, the surface must support at least 36 kg (80 lb)
● For the HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn, the surface must support at least 44 kg (97 lb)
12
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
CAUTION
Note
● A level surface that supports all four corners of the printer
● A constant temperature and humidity (not near water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances).
The HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn must not be installed on an elevated surface. Always install the HP CLJ 4650hdn printer on a hard, level floor.
Make sure to keep the printer away from the following environmental features:
● Direct sunlight, dust, open flames, or water
● The direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems
● Magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field
● Areas that experience vibration
● Walls or other objects
Space around the printer must be sufficient for proper access and ventilation.
Space requirements
The printer must have the following amounts of space above and around it.
Figure 1-8.
1
2
3
HP Color LaserJet 4600/4650 model space requirements (except for the HP Color
LaserJet 4650hdn printer)
530 mm (20.9 inches)
1294 mm (50.9 inches)
804 mm (31.7 inches)
ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications
13
Figure 1-9.
HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer space requirements
1
2
3
530 mm (20.9 inches)
1294 mm (50.9 inches)
1373 mm (54.1 inches)
Physical specifications
Product
HP Color
LaserJet 4600,
4600n, 4600dn,
4650, 4650n, and
4650dn printers
HP Color
LaserJet
4600dtn,
4600hdn, and
4650dtn printers
HP Color
LaserJet
4650hdn printer
Height
566 mm
(22.3 inches)
654 mm
(25.7 inches)
1035 mm
(40.7 inches)
Depth
480 mm
(18.9 inches)
480 mm
(18.9 inches)
645 mm
(25.4 inches)
Width
456 mm
(18.0 inches)
456 mm
(18.0 inches)
460 mm
(18.1 inches)
Electrical specifications
Item
Power requirements; HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models
Power requirements; HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models
110-volt (V) models
100-127 V (-10%, +6%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
100-127 V (+/-10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
Weight
37 kg (81.6 lbs)
44 kg (97.0 lbs)
66 kg (146.6 lbs)
220-volt (V) models
220-240 V (-10%, +6%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
220-240 V (+/-10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
14
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
Power used
Printing
Standby
PowerSave
Off
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
1
Power used
Printing
Standby
PowerSave
Off
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models 1 (except HP Color
LaserJet 4650hdn printer)
Power used
Printing
Standby
PowerSave
Off
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer
1
Minimum recommended circuit capacity for a HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models.
Heat output idle (BTU/hour) for the HP Color LaserJet
4650 models (except for the
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer).
426 watts
34 watts
30 watts
0 watts
560 watts
38 watts
26 watts
0.3 watts
560 watts
40 watts
31 watts
0.3 watts
6 amps
130
430 watts
36 watts
32 watts
0 watts
Same as the 110 V models
Same as the 110 V models
3 amps
Same as the 110 V models
Heat output idle (BTU/hour) for the HP Color LaserJet
4650hdn printer.
137 Same as the 110 V models
1 Values are subject to change. See
Environmental specifications
Specification
Temperature
Humidity
Altitude
Recommended
17 to 25° C (62.6 to 77° F)
Allowed
10 to 30° C (50 to 86° F)
30 to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10 to 80% RH not applicable 0 to 2600 m (0 to 8530 ft)
Identification, site requirements, and specifications
15
Acoustic emissions
Sound Power Level 1 (SPL)
Active (22 ppm letter)
Idle
Declared Per ISO 9296
L
WAd
=6.5 Bels (A) [65 dB (A)]
L
WAd
=5.0 Bels (A) [50 dB (A)]
Declared Per ISO 9296 SPL - Bystander Position
Active (22 ppm letter) L pAm
=51 dB (A)
Idle
L pAm
=34 dB (A)
1 Values are subject to change. See
Supply storage requirements
The life of supplies is greatly affected by their storage environment. Use storage requirements to determine the shelf life of stored supplies.
Table 1-3. Supply storage requirements
Item
Temperature
Humidity
Storage time Storage condition
Normal (maximum of 2.5 years) 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
Severe (maximum of 18 days)
Maximum temperature change rate
High 35° to 40°C (95° to 104°F)
Low 0° to -20°C (32° to -4°F)
40° to 15°C (104° to 59°F) within 3 minutes
-20° to 25°C (-4° to 77°F) within 3 minutes
Normal (maximum of 2.5 years) 35% to 85% RH
Severe (maximum of 18 days) High 85% to 95% RH
Low 10% to 35% RH
Atmospheric pressure 460 to 760 mm Hg (18.1 to
29.9 inches Hg)
Storage time 1 2.5 years
1 The average storage time includes use time. Use cartridges within 2.5 years of the date code on the cartridge.
16
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Print media
The following sections describes print media that can be used in the HP Color LaserJet
Series printer.
Print media specifications
For optimum results, use conventional 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) photocopy paper. Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, curls, or bent edges.
●
To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies
.
● To order supplies worldwide, go to
.
● To order accessories, go to
.
● For additional information about supported media weights and sizes, go to
www.hp.com/ support/ljpaperguide .
The following table contains information about the types of print media that are supported for the various paper-handling features.
ENWW Print media
17
Table 1-4. Supported media specifications
Tray
Tray 1
Supported media
Paper
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
Minimum size: 76 x
127 mm (3 x 5 in)
Maximum size:216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
TransparenciesA4/
Letter
Glossy film
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
Minimum size: 76 x
127 mm (3 x 5 in)
Maximum size: 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Glossy paper
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
Minimum size: 76 x
127 mm (3 x 5 in)
Maximum size: 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Envelopes Com10
Monarch C5 DL B5
Labels (tray 1 only)
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
Minimum size: 76 x
127 mm (3 x 5 in).
Maximum size: 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Media specifications Capacity
HP Color LaserJet
4600 series: 60 to 163 g/m 2 (16 to 43 lb)
HP Color LaserJet
4650 series: 60 to 199 g/m 2 (16 to 53 lb)
100 sheets of 75 g/m
(20 lb) paper. Do not load more than the
2 maximum stack height of 10 mm (0.6 in)
0.13 mm (5 mil)
0.13 mm (5 mil)
75 g/m 2 to 120 g/m 2
(20 lb to 32 lb)
Maximum weight: 105 g/m 2 (28 lb bond) maximum stack height of 10 mm (0.6 in) maximum stack height of 10 mm (0.6 in) maximum stack height of 10 mm (0.6 in)
Limit of 20
Do not load more than the maximum stack height of 10 mm (0.6 in)
18
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Note
ENWW
Table 1-4. Supported media specifications (continued)
Tray Supported media Media specifications Capacity
Tray 2, optional tray 3, and optional tray 3/4
(the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder is only available for the CLJ
4650 models) 1 2
Paper
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
Minimum size: 148 x
210 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in).
Maximum size: 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
TransparenciesA4/
Letter
Glossy film
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
Minimum size: 148 x
210 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in).
Maximum size: 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Glossy paper
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
Minimum size: 148 x
210 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in).
Maximum size:216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
60 to 105 g/m 2 (16 to
28 lb)
0.13 mm (5 mil)
0.13 mm (5 mil)
75 g/m 2 to 120 g/m 2
(20 lb to 32 lb)
500 sheets of 75 g/m 2
(20 lb) paper.
Maximum stack height of 50 mm (2 inches)
Limit of 100 sheets
Limit of 100 sheets
Limit of 200 sheets
Duplex printing Paper, glossy paper
A4/Letter, Legal,
Executive, JIS, B5, A5,
Custom
75 g/m 2 to 105 g/m 2
(20 lb to 28 lb)
Custom paper sizes are not supported for 2sided printing.
1
Tray 2, tray 3, and tray 3/4 do not support the range of custom sizes that tray 1 does.
2 Tray 2, tray 3, and tray 3/4 use custom size, specifically for B5 ISO.
Use only HP-supported transparencies (HP part number C2934A, Letter size; C2936A,
A4 size).
Media to avoid
This printer can handle many types of media. Using media outside the printer's specifications will cause a loss of print quality and increase the incidence of jams.
● Do not use paper that is too rough.
● Do not use paper that contains cutouts or perforations other than standard three-hole punched paper.
● Do not use multipart forms.
Print media
19
Note
Note
● Do not use paper that has already been printed on or fed through a photocopier or printer.
● Do not use paper that contains a watermark if you are printing solid patterns.
Media that can cause damage to the printer
In rare circumstances media can damage the printer. To prevent possible damage, do not use the following media:
● Do not use paper that is embossed or coated unless it is specifically recommended for use in this printer.
● Do not use paper that contains irregularities such as tabs or staples.
● Do not use letterhead paper that was produced by using low temperature dyes or thermography. Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate 190°C
(374°F) for 0.1 second.
● Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions, or that melts, offsets, or discolors when exposed to 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
● Do not use transparencies that are designed for use with Inkjet printers or other lowtemperature printers. Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color
LaserJet printers.
Printing on special media
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media.
●
For optimum results, use conventional 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) xerographic paper.
● Verify that the paper is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, curls, or bent edges.
Special media such as envelopes, transparencies, custom-size paper, or media that is heavier than 120 g/m 2 should be fed only from tray 1.
To print on any special media, use the following procedure.
1. Load the media in a tray.
2. When the printer prompts you for the paper type, select the correct media type for the media that is loaded in the tray. For example, select HIGH GLOSS (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models only) when loading high gloss laser paper.
3. In the software program or the printer driver, set the media type to match the media type that is loaded in the paper tray.
For the best print quality, always verify that the media type that is selected on the printer control panel and the media type that is selected in the software program or printer driver match the type of media that is loaded in the tray.
20
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
CAUTION
Note
Transparencies
When printing on transparencies, use the following guidelines:
● Handle transparencies by the edges. Oils from your fingers that are deposited on the transparency can cause print-quality problems.
● Use only overhead transparencies that are recommended for use in this printer. Hewlett-
Packard Company recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this printer. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results.
● In either the software program or the driver, select TRANSPARENCY as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for transparencies.
Transparencies that are not designed for LaserJet printing will melt in the printer, causing damage to the printer.
Table 1-5. Printing on transparencies
Description
Electrical surface resistivity
Fusing compatibility
Caliper (thickness)
Specifications
2.0 to 15 ohms by 10 ohms per square inch.
Materials must not discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to
190ºC (374ºF) for 0.1 second.
0.12 mm (0.0048 inch) to 0.13 mm (0.0052 inch).
Glossy paper
● In either the software program or the driver, select GLOSSY, HEAVY, or HIGH GLOSS
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only) as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
● Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY for the input tray that is being used.
● Because this setting affects all print jobs, return the printer to its original settings after the job has printed.
Hewlett-Packard Company recommends using HP Color LaserJet High Gloss paper with this printer. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results. If HP Color
LaserJet High Gloss paper is not used with this printer, print quality might be compromised.
Colored paper
● Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper.
● Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer’s fusing temperature of 190°C (374°
F) for 0.1 second without deterioration.
● Do not use paper that contains a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced.
● The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots, overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors. Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed colors.
ENWW Print media
21
Note
Note
Printing images
To obtain the best print quality when printing images, use HP High Gloss Laser Paper
(Q2419A). In either the software program or the driver, select GLOSSY, HEAVY, or HIGH
GLOSS (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only) or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
● In either the software program or the printer driver, select HIGH GLOSS IMAGES (HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models only) as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
● You can also configure the printer by using settings on the printer control panel.
Envelopes
Envelopes can be printed on only from tray 1. Set the tray media size to the specific envelope size.
Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure high-quality printing on envelopes and help prevent printer jams:
● Do not load more than 20 envelopes into tray 1.
●
The weight-rating of envelopes should not exceed 105 g/m
2
(28 lb bond).
● Envelopes should be flat.
● Do not use envelopes that contain windows or clasps.
● Envelopes must not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
● Envelopes that include peel-off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer’s fusing process.
● Envelopes should be loaded face-down, with the postage-end feeding into the printer first.
Labels
To print on labels, set the tray media type to LABELS on the printer control panel. When printing on labels, use the following guidelines:
● Verify that the adhesive material on the labels can tolerate 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
● Verify that no adhesive material is exposed between the labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause printer jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components.
● Do not refeed a sheet of labels.
● Verify that the labels lie flat.
● Do not use labels that are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Heavy paper
The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
22
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
CAUTION
ENWW
Paper type
Heavy
Extra heavy
Cardstock
Intermediate
Tough paper
Paper weight
105 to 120 g/m 2
28 to 32 lb
120 to 163 g/m 2
32 to 43 lb
163 to 199 g/m 2
43 to 53 lb
90 to105 g/m 2
24 to 28 lb
5 mil
44 lb
When printing on heavy paper types, use the following guidelines:
●
Use tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 to 199 g/m 2 (32 to 53 lb bond).
● For optimum results when printing on heavy paper, use the printer control panel to set the media type for the tray to HEAVY.
● In either the software program or the driver, select HEAVY as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper.
● Because this setting affects all print jobs, return the printer to its original settings after the job has printed.
In general do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended for this printer. Doing so can cause misfeeds, paper jams, reduced print quality, and excessive mechanical wear.
HP LaserJet Tough paper
When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper, use the following guidelines:
● Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper by the edges. Oils from your fingers that are deposited on HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print-quality problems.
● Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this printer. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results.
● In either the software program or the driver, select TOUGH PAPER as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper.
Preprinted forms and letterhead
Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead:
● Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing temperature of approximately 190°C (374°F) heat for 0.1 second.
● Inks must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers.
● Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage.
Print media
23
Note
● Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off of preprinted paper.
● When using the duplex printing setting, load pre-printed forms and letterhead into tray 2 and tray 3 with the front of the page facing down and the top edge of the page towards the back of the printer. To load preprinted forms and letterhead into tray 1, load them with the front of the page facing up and the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.
Recycled paper
This printer supports the use of recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
The Hewlett-Packard Company recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground wood.
Weight equivalence table
The weight equivalence table shows equivalent weights for different grades of paper. A boldface type value indicates a commonly available standard weight for that grade.
Text and book grades marked with an asterisk (*) actually calculate to 51, 61, 71, and 81 but are rounded to standard book or text weights of 50, 60, 70, and 80.
39
40
43
45
47
29
32
36
16
17
20
21
24
27
28
Table 1-6. Weight equivalence table
Bond weight
(17 x 22 in.)
Text/Book weight
(25 x 38 in.)
Cover weight (20 x 26 in.)
100
101
110
115
119
74
80*
90
41
43
50*
54
60*
68
70*
55
55
60
63
65
41
44
50
22
24
28
30
33
37
39
82
83
90
94
97
61
67
75
33
35
42
44
50
55
58
45
49
50
55
62
67
68
74
77
80
Bristol weight
(22.5 x 28.5
in.)
27
29
34
36
41
Index weight
(25.5 x 30.5
in.)
Tag weight
(24 x 36 in.)
91
92
100
104
108
68
74
83
37
39
46
49
55
61
65
Metric weight
60 g/m
2
64 g/m
2
75 g/m
2
80 g/m
2
90 g/m
2
100 g/m
2
105 g/m
2
110 g/m
2
120 g/m
2
135 g/m
2
148 g/m2
150 g/m
2
163 g/m2
170 g/m
2
176 g/m2
24
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
54
58
65
66
67
70
72
Table 1-6. Weight equivalence table (continued)
51 128 70 86
53 134 74 90
137
146
165
169
171
178
183
75
80
90
92
94
98
100
93
98
111
114
115
120
123
135
138
140
146
150
105
110
113
120
150
154
155
162
166
117
122
125
133
190 g/m
2
199 g/m 2
203 g/m 2
216 g/m 2
244 g/m
2
250 g/m
2
253 g/m 2
264 g/m 2
271 g/m
2
ENWW Print media
25
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on the environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O
3
).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this printer. As an ENERGY
STAR ® partner, Hewlett-Parkard has determined this product meets the ENERGY STAR ® for energy efficiency.
ENERGY STAR ® is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. As an ENERGY STAR
®
partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR
®
Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see
Paper use
This product’s optional, automatic, duplex feature (two-sided printing, and N-up printing
(multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams have markings according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (print cartridges, fuser, and transfer unit) can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling
Program. An easy-to-use and free take back program is available in over 48 countries/ regions. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP
LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package.
26
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program
Information
Since 1990, the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected millions of used LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world's landfills. The HP LaserJet print cartridges and supplies are collected and bulk-shipped to our resource and recovery partners, who disassemble the cartridges. After a thorough quality inspection, selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges. Remaining materials are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful products.
● U.S. returns—For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies, HP encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single, pre-paid, and pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information in the U.S., call 800-340-2445 or visit the HP
LaserJet Supplies Web site at www.hp.com/go/recycle .
● Non-U.S. recycling returns—Non-U.S. customers should call the local HP Sales and
Service Office or visit the www.hp.com/go/recycle Web site for further information
regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Recycled paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN 12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This product does not contain batteries.
This product does not contain added mercury.
This product contains lead in solder that might require special handling at end-of-life.
For recycling information, contact
www.hp.com/go/recycle , contact your local authorities, or
go to the Electronics Industries Alliance Web site
For more information
.
Go to www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment for more
information about HP’s environmental programs, including:
● Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
● HP’s commitment to the environment
● HP’s environmental management system
● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
● Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Environmental product stewardship program
27
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
HP Color LaserJet 4600/4650, 4600n/4650n,
4600dn/4650dn, 4600dtn/4650dtn, and
4600hdn/4650hdn printer
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
One-year limited warranty
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
HP’s limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW,
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Declaration of ConformityDeclaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Development Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
Regulatory Model Number 4 :
HP Color LaserJet 4600/4600n/4600dn/4600dtn/4600hdn printers
HP Color LaserJet 4650/4650n/4650dn/4650dtn/4650hdn printers
BOISB-0304-00
C9660A, C9692A, C9661A, C9662A, C9663A
28
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Product Options: conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Q3668A, Q3669A, Q3670A, Q3671A, Q3672A
Including
C9664A 500-sheetpaer feeder
Q3673A - Optional 500-Sheet Input Tray
Q3674A - Optional 2 x 500-Sheet Input Tray
All
Safety: IEC 60950:1999 / EN60950:2000
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001 / EN60825-1:1994 +A11:1996 +A2:2001 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
EMC:
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 Class B 1, 3
EN 61000-3-2:1995 / A14
EN 61000-3-3:1995 / A1
EN 55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B
2
/ ICES-003, Issue 3
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly:
1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
The product includes LAN (Local Area Network) options. When the interface cable is attached to LAN connectors, the product meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A in which case the following applies: "Warning - This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures".
4 For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
29 January, 2004
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia, Ltd. 31-41 Joseph Street Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact:
USA Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE/Standards
Europe Herrenberger Straße 140 Böblingen, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
Product Relations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, USA
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
29
Country/region laser safety statements
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques.
«CEM».»
EMI statement (Korea)
VCCI statement (Japan)
30
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Laser Statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP Color LaserJet 4600/4650, 4600/4650n, 4600/4650dn, 4650dtn, 4650hdn laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP Color LaserJet 4650, 4650n, 4650dn, 4650dtn, 4650hdn -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm
Teho 5 m W
Luokan 3B laser
ENWW Country/region laser safety statements
31
32
Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
2
Service approach
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
ENWW
33
Service approach
Printer repair normally begins by using the printer's internal diagnostics and the following three-step process.
1. Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the host computer, the network or server, or the printer system).
2. Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine.
3. Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in chapter 7.
After you locate a faulty part, the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level. Hewlett-Packard does not support replacement of components on the printer circuit assembles.
34
Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW
Parts and supplies
CAUTION
Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in Chapter 8 of this manual. Order replacement parts from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-
Packard Customer Support-Europe (HPCS-E).
Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider.
Ordering parts, supplies, and accessories over the Internet
To order supplies in the US, contact
www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies . To order supplies worldwide,
see
. To order accessories, see www.hp.com
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers with network connections)
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server.
1. In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the printer. The printer status window appears. Or, go to the URL provided in the alert email.
2. Click Other Links.
3. Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send information about the printer to HP. You also have the option to order supplies without sending the printer information to HP.
4. Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.
Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models only)
The HP Toolbox software gives you the ability to order supplies directly from the computer.
Two things are necessary to use this feature:
● The HP Toolbox software must be installed on your computer. (It is automatically installed as part of the typical software installation.)
● You must have access to the World Wide Web.
1. At the bottom right of the screen (in the system tray), click the hp Toolbox icon. The software opens in a Web browser. (Or, on the Start menu, select Programs, and then select HP Toolbox.)
2. On the left side of the window, click Other Links.
3. Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to the supplies purchasing page.
4. Select the supplies you want to order.
ENWW Parts and supplies
35
Exchange program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-
Packard Customer Support-Europe (HPCS-E).
Supplies
Paper and print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See chapter 8 for ordering information.
World Wide Web
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product and support information can be obtained from the following URL:
In the U.S.:
www.hp.com/support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650
Printer drivers can be obtained from the following sites:
In China: ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/lj4600 or ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/lj4650
In Japan: ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/lj4600 or ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/lj4650
In Korea: www.hp.co.kr/support/lj4600 or www.hp.co.kr/support/lj4600
In Taiwan:
www.hp.com.tw/support/lj4600 or www.hp.com.tw/support/lj4650
or the local driver Web site:
HP Service Parts Information
Parts identification and pricing information can also be found on the World Wide Web at
36
Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW
HP customer care
Online services
For 24-hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection:
World Wide Web URL: for the HP Color LaserJet 4600/4650 models, updated HP printer software, product and support information, and printer drivers in several languages can be obtained from
www.hp.com/support/clj4600 or www.hp.com/support/clj4650 . (Sites are in
English.)
Visit
www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about the HP Jetdirect 4650 external
print server.
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and resolve computing and printing problems. The ISPE tools are available at
Telephone support
HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. When you call, you will be connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. For the telephone number for your
and serial number, date of purchase, and description of the problem.
You can also find support on the Internet at
. Click the support & drivers block.
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Visit www.hp.com/go/clj4650_software for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models. The Web
page for the drivers might be in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in several languages.
See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer for phone-contact information.
HP service information
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call 800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 800-387-3867 (Canada). For service for your product, call the customer support number for your country/region. See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer.
HP service agreements
Call 800-835-4747 (U.S.) or 800-268-1221 (Canada).
For extended Service call, 800-446-0522
HP Toolbox (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
To check the printer status and settings and to view troubleshooting information and online documentation, use HP Toolbox. You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. You must have performed a complete software installation to use the HP Toolbox.
HP support and information for Macintosh computers
Visit
www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription
service for driver updates.
Visit
www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user.
ENWW HP customer care
37
Ordering related documentation and software
The following table lists part numbers for related documentation and software.
Description
HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide
HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator's
Guide
Part Number
5963-7863
5971-3257
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Getting
Started Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4650 Series Getting
Started Guide
5021-0330
C9660-90902
Q3668-90902
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Service Manual
C9660-90901
Note
This service manual include both the HP Color
LaserJet 4600 and 4650 model printers.
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Service
Manual (this manual provides service information about the CLJ 4600 and CLJ 4650 models)
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer Service and Support CD-ROM
Q3668-90901
Q3668-60105
HP Color LaserJet 4650 User Guide
For downloadable versions, go to
. When connected, select manuals.
Q3668-90909
38
Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW
3
Installation and configuration
This chapter contains information about the follow topics.
Auxiliary connection configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .............................55
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB, HP
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected ....................69
39
ENWW
40
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Unpacking the printer
Note
WARNING!
Save all the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the printer at a later date.
The HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer weighs approximately 36 kg (80 lb). HP recommends having two or more people lift or move the printer.
1. Do not cut the straps. Open the top flaps of the packing box. Detach the straps from the top flaps and lay them on the floor.
ENWW Unpacking the printer
41
2. Lift the box frame up and off of the printer.
3. If the printer has an optional 500-sheet paper feeder, it is packaged on top of the printer.
Lift the 500-sheet paper feeder from the package, and place it in the prepared location.
42
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
4. Remove the shipping blocks, accessory packs, and inner cardboard frame that surrounds the printer.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to lift the printer by yourself. At least two people must lift the printer and place it in the prepared location. While two people can lift the printer, using three or four people to lift the printer is a much easier and safer way to move the printer.
5. Lift the printer from the packaging pallet and place it in the prepared location.
ENWW Unpacking the printer
43
Note
6. If you are using an optional 500-sheet paper feeder or a 2 x 500-sheet feeder (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models only), align the printer with the guide pins on top of the paper feeder (the optional 500-sheet paper feeder is shown in the following illustration).
While two people can lift the printer, at least one other person should be available to help position the printer on an optional paper feeder if one is installed.
7. Remove the packing tape from the front and rear of the printer.
44
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
CAUTION
8. Using the side handles, open the top cover. Firmly lift the two green handles (one on each side of the fuser). Lift the fuser cover completely, and pull on either of the orange tabs to remove the orange fuser packing tape and plastic shipping locks. Close the fuser cover.
Make sure that you remove all of the packing materials to avoid damage to the printer when the power is turned on.
9. Open the front cover and remove the packing tape from the transfer unit. Close the front cover and the top cover.
ENWW Unpacking the printer
45
Installing the media tray
CAUTION
1. Remove the tray from the printer. Push the media lift plate down until it locks. Remove the cardboard from the tray.
You must push the media lift plate down until it locks every time you open the tray. Jams will result if the media lift plate is not locked in the down position.
2. Adjust the rear length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back of the tray to the length of the media being loaded. Slide the width guides to the desired size.
3. Load media face-up. Make sure that the front corners of the media fit under the front corner tabs.
4. Slide the media input tray straight into the slot at the bottom of the printer.
46
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Connecting power
1. Plug the ac power cord into the printer and into the power outlet.
2. Turn the printer on.
ENWW Connecting power
47
Installing the print cartridges
1. Open the top cover. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down. The front cover will open as you pull down the transfer unit.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is punctured, print quality problems can result.
2. Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side.
3. Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock. Remove and discard the orange shipping lock.
48
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
4. Remove the inside sealing tape by pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out. Discard the tape.
5. Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge. Insert the print cartridges, starting with the bottom cartridge, in the position shown (C = cyan, Y = yellow,
M = magenta, K = black).
6. Close the transfer unit and front cover. Close the top cover. After a short while, the
Ready message should appear on the control-panel display.
ENWW Installing the print cartridges
49
Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Some printer models are shipped without the control panel overlay installed or you might prefer using a different overlay from the one that is installed. Overlays are available for several languages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1. Open the top cover. Use a small flat-blade screw driver to release the locking tabs on either side of the control-panel overlay, and then remove the overlay.
2. Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel. Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face. Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel. Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the blue button.
3. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
4. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
5. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
7. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
8. Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
9. Press to select LANGUAGE.
10. Press to highlight the desired language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
50
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed. Labels are available for several languages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1. Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label.
2. Position the new label over the top of the control panel.
3. Press the label firmly down onto the control panel.
Note
When applying the label, start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel.
4. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
5. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
7. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
8. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
9. Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
10. Press to select LANGUAGE.
11. Press to highlight the desired language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
ENWW Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
51
Testing the printer operation
Print a configuration page to ensure that the printer is working correctly.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
52
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Using PowerSave
Note
The adjustable PowerSave Time feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period. You can set the length of time before the printer goes into PowerSave mode (PowerSave settings vary depending on the model of printer that you have).
The printer control-panel display dims when the printer is in PowerSave mode. PowerSave mode does not affect printer warm-up time.
To set PowerSave Time
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6. Press to highlight POWERSAVE TIME.
7. Press to select POWERSAVE TIME.
8. Press or to select the appropriate time period.
9. Press to set the time period.
10. Press Pause/Resume (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models).
To turn PowerSave on or off
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to enter the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight RESETS.
5. Press to select RESETS.
6. Press to highlight POWERSAVE.
7. Press to select POWERSAVE.
8. Press or to select ON or OFF.
9. Press to set the selection.
10. Press Pause/Resume (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models).
ENWW Using PowerSave
53
Connecting to a computer
Note
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers support network and parallel connections at the same time.
Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more network connections on the printer.
Note
Parallel connections
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models: You can not use the parallel connection and the USB connection at the same time.
To establish a parallel connection, connect the printer to the computer by using a bidirectional parallel cable (IEEE-1284-C). Plug that connector into the printer's parallel port.
The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters (30 feet) long.
When used to describe a parallel interface, the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port.
Figure 3-1.
Parallel port connection (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Figure 3-2.
Parallel port connection (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
54
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Note
Note
To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface, ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed. These enhanced capabilities include bidirectional communication between the computer and printer, faster transfer of data, and automatic configuration of printer drivers.
USB configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
This printer supports a USB 1.1 connection. The port is located on the back of the printer, as shown in
. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable.
USB support is not available for computers running Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0. You can not use the parallel connection and the USB connection at the same time.
Figure 3-3.
USB connection
1
2
USB connector
USB port
Auxiliary connection configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
This printer supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling input devices. The port is located on the back of the printer, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-4.
Auxiliary connection
1 Auxiliary connection port
ENWW Connecting to a computer
55
Network connections
Use one of the following procedures to establish the appropriate connection to the network.
Direct to network
Connect one end of the network cable to the RJ-45 port on the HP Jetdirect print server card. Connect the other end to the network.
Figure 3-5.
Direct to network connection
Network print server
Connect one end of a network cable into the server. Connect the other end to the network.
Connect one end of a second network cable to the printer and the other end to the network.
Figure 3-6.
Network print server connection
56
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Peer to peer (direct to network)
Connect one end of a network cable to the computer. Connect the other end to the network.
Connect one end of a second parallel cable to the printer and the other end to the network.
Figure 3-7.
Peer to peer connection (direct to network)
Peer to peer (parallel)
Connect two or more computers to the network hub by using network cables. Connect one end of a parallel cable to the printer. Connect the other end to a computer.
Figure 3-8.
Peer to peer connection (parallel)
Enhanced I/O (EIO) configuration
This printer comes equipped with three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots. The three EIO slots hold compatible external devices such as the HP Jetdirect print server network cards or other devices. Plugging EIO network cards into the slots increases the number of network interfaces that are available to the printer.
ENWW Connecting to a computer
57
Note
Note
EIO network cards can maximize printer performance when you are printing from a network.
They also provide the ability to place the printer anywhere on a network. This eliminates the need to attach the printer directly to a server or a workstation and allows you to place the printer closer to the network users.
If the printer is configured through an EIO network card, configure that card through the printer control-panel Configure device menu.
HP Jetdirect print servers
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) can be installed in one of the printer EIO slots.
These cards support multiple network protocols and operating systems. HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location. HP Jetdirect print servers also support the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software.
Installation of these cards and network configuration should be performed by a network administrator. Configure the card either through the printer control panel or by using HP Web
Jetadmin software.
See the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information about which external devices or EIO network cards are supported.
Available enhanced I/O interfaces
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) provide software solutions for the following interfaces:
● Novell NetWare
●
Microsoft ® Windows ® and Windows NT ® networks
● Apple Mac OS (LocalTalk)
●
UNIX
®
(HP-Ux and Solaris)
● Linux (Red Hat and SuSE)
● Internet printing
For a summary of available network software solutions, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server
Administrator's Guide, or visit HP Customer Care online at
www.hp.com/support/ net_printing .
NetWare networks
When using Novell NetWare products with an HP Jetdirect print server, Queue Server mode provides improved printing performance over Remote Printer mode. The HP Jetdirect print server supports Novell Directory Services (NDS) as well as bindery modes. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide.
For Windows 95, 98, Millenium Edition (Me), NT 4.0, 2000, and XP systems, use the printer installation utility for printer setup on a NetWare network.
58
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Note
ENWW
Windows and Windows NT networks
For Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, and XP systems, use your printer installation utility for printer setup on a Microsoft Windows network. The utility supports printer setup for either peer-to-peer or client-server network operation.
AppleTalk networks
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to set up the printer on an EtherTalk or LocalTalk network. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide that is included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server.
LocalTalk configuration
Use LocalTalk interface to print directly from a standalone Apple Macintosh computer or from a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network. For specific information about configuring the computer and printer to print through a LocalTalk interface, see the printer getting started guide and the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide.
For LocalTalk configuration, the DIN-8 printer cable must be connected to the printer port on the Macintosh computer.
LocalTalk network configuration
To connect the printer to a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network, use the
HP LocalTalk Cable Kit (part number, J4135A). You will need a kit for each printer and an additional kit for each Macintosh computer on the network.
UNIX/Linux networks
Use the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX utility to set up the printer on HP-Ux or Sun
Solaris networks.
For setup and management on UNIX or Linux networks, use HP Web Jetadmin.
To obtain HP software for UNIX/Linux networks, visit HP Customer Care online at
www.hp.com/support/net_printing
. For other installation options supported by the
HP Jetdirect print server, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide that is included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server.
Wireless printing
Wireless networks offer a safe, secure, and cost-effective alternative to traditional wired network connections.
IEEE 802.11b standard
By using the wireless HP Jetdirect 802.11b external print server, HP peripherals can be placed anywhere in the office or home and connected to a wireless network running
Microsoft, Apple, Netware, UNIX, or Linux network operating systems. This wireless technology provides a high-quality printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring.
Peripherals can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without changing network cables.
Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard.
Connecting to a computer
59
Note
HP Jetdirect 802.11b print servers are available for USB and parallel connections.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth wireless technology 1 is not supported for the Macintosh operating system.
Bluetooth wireless technology 1 is a low-power, short-range radio technology that can be used to wireless connect computers, printers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cell phones, and other devices.
Unlike infrared technology, Bluetooth’s reliance on radio signals means that devices do not have to be in the same room, office, or cubicle or have an unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate. This wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business network programs.
HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer models use a Bluetooth adapter (hp bt1300) to incorporate
Bluetooth wireless technology. The adapter is available for either USB or parallel connections. The adapter has a 10-meter operation range in the 2.5 GHz ISM band and can achieve data transfer rates up to 723 Kbps. The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles:
● Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP)
● Serial Port Profile (SPP)
● Object Push Profile (OPP)
● Basic Imaging Profile (BIP)
● Basic Printing Profile (BPP) with xHTML-Print
1 The Bluetooth trademarks are owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard company under licence.
60
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Printer drivers
Note
The optimal way to control the printer is by establishing settings in a software program or through the printer driver. Changing print settings in a software program affects only that particular print job. In most software programs, you can select print settings from menus within the program. Software program settings and printer driver settings override the settings on the printer control panel.
For best print quality, always use the printer driver to select the paper or media type.
Different media types use different printer settings. For example, selecting transparencies in the driver causes the printer to use a color table that is designed for the best print quality on transparencies. Selecting transparencies also causes the printer to adjust printer speed and fuser temperature. Selecting heavy or glossy media for example, causes the printer to change the engine speed.
The printer driver also gives you customized control of color text, graphics, and photos. Use the printer driver to set the following color control options for the HP Color LaserJet 4600
Series printers:
● Print in Grayscale
● Halftone options
● Neutral Grays
● Edge Control
● RGB Color
For the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only, you can also set the following options:
●
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for
Windows 2000 and Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories that the Driver
Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). If the environment supports bidirectional communication, the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installed component by default for a
Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation.
● Update now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or
Windows XP hosts.
● HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that can be used to customize and distribute HP software in managed corporate printing environments.
Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver
Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at
or
at www.hp.com/support/lj4650 .
ENWW Printer drivers
61
Note
Note
See the printer driver online Help for details about color settings and how they effect printed output.
Available drivers
Printer drivers allow you to gain access to the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer (by using a printer language). Check the installation notes and
Readme files on the printer CD-ROM for additional software and languages.
The following printer drivers are included with the printer. The most recent drivers are
available at www.hp.com/support/lj4600 or at www.hp.com/support/lj4650 . Depending on the
configuration of Windows-based computers, the installation program for the printer software automatically checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers.
Operating system
1
PCL 6
Windows 98, Me
x
Windows NT 4.0
x
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server
2003
x x x
PCL 5c
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
Web only
PS
x x x x x
PPD 2 x x x x x
Macintosh OS
x x
1 Not all features are available from all drives or operating systems. See the online Help in your driver for available features.
2 PostScript Printer Description files.
If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software installation, download them from
www.hp.com/support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 .
After you are connected, select Downloads and Drivers to find the driver that you want to download.
You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. See the support flyer that came in the printer box.
OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.
If the printer driver you want is not on the printer CD-ROM or is not listed here, check the installation notes and Readme files to see if the printer driver is supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program you are using and request a driver for the printer.
Additional drivers
The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet or from HP Customer Care.
● PCL 5c printer drivers for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
● OS/2 PCL 5c/6 printer driver
62
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Note
Note
Note
● OS/2 PS printer driver
● UNIX model scripts
● Linux drivers
● HP Open VMS drivers
The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They are not available for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese languages.
For more information about Windows 3.1x drivers, go to
or
Select the right printer driver for your needs
Select a printer driver based on the way that you use the printer. Certain printer features are available only in the PCL 6 drivers. See the printer driver Help for available features.
● Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of printer features. For general office printing, the PCL 6 driver is recommended to provide optimum performance and print quality.
● Use the PCL 5c driver (available on the Web only) if backward compatibility with previous PCL printer drivers or older printers is necessary.
● Use the PS driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-specific programs such as
Adobe and Corel, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS font DIMM support.
The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Printer driver Help
Each printer driver has Help screens that can be activated by using the Help button, the F1 button on the computer keyboard, or a question-mark symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver (depending on the Windows operating system used). These Help screens give detailed information about the specific driver. Printer driver Help is separate from your program Help.
ENWW Printer drivers
63
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog
Extensions (PDEs), and the HP LaserJet Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
The embedded Web server can be used by Macintosh computers if the printer is connected to a network.
Note
PPDs
Use PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript drivers, to gain access to the printer features and to allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation program for the PPDs, PDEs, and other software is provided on the CD-ROM. Use the appropriate
PS driver that comes with the operating system.
HP LaserJet Utility
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet
Utility to do the following:
● Name the printer, assign it to a zone on a network, and download files and fonts.
● Configure and set the printer for Internet protocol (IP) printing.
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X, but the utility is supported for the
Classic environment.
64
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Installing the printing system software
Note
The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software.
The printer comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing system software on the CD-ROM must be installed in order to take full advantage of the printer features.
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system software from the Internet at
www.hp.com/support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 .
Sample model scripts for UNIX (HP-UX, Sun Solaris) and Linux networks are available for download at
You can download the latest software free of charge at
or
Note
Note
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections
Only the HP LaserJet 4650 models supports the USB cable connection described in this section.
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98,
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software before connecting the parallel or USB cable. If the parallel or USB cable was connected before the software installation, see
Installing the software after the parallel or
USB cable has been connected .
Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection. However, you cannot connect both the parallel and USB cable at the same time. Use an IEEE 1284-C cable or a standard 2-meter USB cable.
Windows NT 4.0 does not support USB cable connections.
To install the printing system software
1. Close all software programs that are open or running.
2. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
● On the Start menu, click Run.
● Type the following: x:\setup (where x is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
● Click OK.
3. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4. Click Finish when the installation has been completed.
5. You might need to restart the computer.
6. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
ENWW Installing the printing system software
65
Note
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to
www.hp.com/ support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 for help or more information.
Installing Windows printing system software for networks
The software on the printer CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network.
For network installation on other operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 .
The HP Jetdirect print server that is included with the HP LaserJet 4650n, HP LaserJet
4650dn, or HP LaserJet 4650dtn printer has a 10/100 Base-Tx network port. If you need an
HP Jetdirect print server with another type of network port, go to
or
The installer does not support printer installation or printer object creation on Novell servers.
It supports only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a printer. To install your printer and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web Jetadmin or HP Install Network Printer Wizard) or a Novell utility (such as
NWadmin).
To install the printing system software
1. If you are installing the software on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP, make sure that you have administrator privileges.
2. Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server is configured correctly for the network by printing a configuration page. On the second page, locate the printer IP address. You might need this address to complete network installation.
3. Close all software programs that are open or running.
4. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
● On the Start menu, click Run.
● Type the following: x:\setup (where x is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
● Click OK.
5. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6. Click Finish when the installation has been completed.
7. You might need to restart the computer.
8. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to
www.hp.com/ support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 for help or more information.
To set up Windows-sharing to use the printer on a network
If the printer is directly connected to a computer with a parallel cable, you can share the printer on the network so that other network users can print to it.
66
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Note
Note
ENWW
See your Windows documentation to make Windows-sharing available. After the printer is shared, install the printer software on all computers that share the printer.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing system software supports Apple Mac OS version 9.1.x and later.
The printing system software includes the following components:
●
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to printer features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the CD-ROM that came with the printer. Use the appropriate PS driver that comes with the operating system.
●
HP LaserJet Utility
The HP LaserJet Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver. Use the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following tasks with the printer:
● Name the printer.
● Assign the printer to a zone on the network.
● Assign an IP to the printer.
● Download files and fonts.
● Configure and set the printer for IP or AppleTalk printing.
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X, but the utility is supported for the
Classic environment.
To install printer drivers from Mac OS 9.1.x and later
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/
<language> folder of the Starter CD-ROM (where <language> is your language preference). For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the
English printer software.
3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4. Open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility located in the {Startup Disk}:Applications: Utilities folder.
5. Double-click Printer (AppleTalk).
6. Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change.
7. Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
8. On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic. All the print panels appear in the Print dialog box in a program.
Installing the printing system software
67
Note
Note
To install printer drivers from Mac OS 10.X
1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/
<language> folder of the Starter CD-ROM (where <language> is your language preference). (For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the
English printer software.)
3. Double-click the HP LaserJet Installers folder.
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5. Double-click the Installer icon for the desired language.
6. On your computer hard drive, double-click Applications, Utilities, and then Print Center.
7. Click Add Printer.
8. Select the AppleTalk connection type on OS X 10.1 and the Rendezvous connection type on OS X 10.2.
9. Select the printer name.
10. Click Add Printer.
11. Close the Print Center by clicking the close button in the upper-left corner.
Macintosh computers cannot be connected directly to the printer using a parallel port.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB, HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections.
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS 9.x and later.
The Apple LaserWriter driver must be installed to use the PPD files. Use the Apple
LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh computer.
To install the printing system software
1. Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on the computer. Use a standard 2-meter USB cable.
2. Close all software programs that are open or running.
3. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer.
The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the
Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder of the Starter CD-
ROM (where <language> is your language preference).
4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5. Restart the computer.
68
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Note
Note
Note
Note
6. For Mac OS 9.x and later:
● From HD/Applications/Utilities, open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility.
● Double-click Printer (USB).
● Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change.
● Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
● Click the Desktop Printer Icon that was just created.
● On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
For Mac OS X: From HD/Applications/Utilities/Print Center, start the Print Center. If the printer does not set up automatically, do the following:
● Click Add Printer.
● From within the printer list, select USB as the connection type.
● Select the printer and then click Add in the lower-left corner.
7. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to
www.hp.com/ support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 for help or more information.
The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic. All the print panels appear in the Print dialog box in a program.
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected
Only the HP LaserJet 4650 models supports the USB cable connection described in this section.
If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer, the New
Hardware Found dialog box appears when you turn on the computer.
To install the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive.
2. Click Next.
3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to
www.hp.com/ support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 for help or more information.
ENWW Installing the printing system software
69
Note
To install the software for Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows 2003
1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search.
2. On the Locate Driver Files screen, select the Specify a Location check box, click to clear all of the other check boxes, and then click Next.
3. Type the letter for the root directory. For example, X:\ (where "X:\" is the letter of the root directory on the CD-ROM drive).
4. Click Next.
5. Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6. Click Finish when the installation has been completed.
7. Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
8. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to
www.hp.com/ support/lj4600 or www.hp.com/support/lj4650 for help or more information.
70
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Network configuration
Use the information in this section to configure the printer for use in a network.
Configuring the printer for the network
You can configure certain network parameters on the printer from the printer control panel or, for most networks, from the HP Web Jetadmin software (or the HP LaserJet Utility for
Macintosh). The utilities are provided on the printing software CD-ROM that comes with the printer. You can also set these parameters from the HP Web Jetadmin software, which is
available at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
.
For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions to configure network parameters from software such as HP Web Jetadmin, see the HP Jetdirect
Administrator's Guide. The guide comes on the CD-ROM with printers in which an
HP Jetdirect 610N print server is installed.
Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters
The HP Jetdirect 610N (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or the HP Jetdirect 620N (HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models) print server automatically selects a NetWare frame type. Select a frame type manually only when the print server selects an incorrect frame type. To identify the frame type that the HP Jetdirect 610N/620N print server selected, print a configuration page.
ENWW Network configuration
71
Software for networks
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with the printer.
72
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
Use HP Web Jetadmin to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet by using a browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network administration server. It can be installed and run on Red
Hat Linux; Suse Linux; Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation; Windows 2000
Professional, Server, and Advanced Server; and Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 systems.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host
systems, visit HP Customer Care Online at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
.
When installed on a host server, any client can open HP Web Jetadmin through a supported
Web browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0).
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
● The task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers significant time.
● Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function that is viewed or used.
● Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other printer problems can be routed to different people.
● Remote installation and management is available from anywhere by using only a standard Web browser.
● Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering each printer into a database.
● The software accommodates simple integration into enterprise management packages.
● You can quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability, and model name.
● You can easily organize peripherals into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy navigation.
● You can manage and configure multiple printers at one time.
For the latest information about HP Web Jetadmin go to
UNIX
The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP-Ux and
Solaris networks. It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at
www.hp.com/ support/net_printing
.
Utilities
ENWW
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers are equipped with several utilities that make them easy to monitor and manage on a network.
Utilities
73
Embedded Web server
This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server which provides access to information about printer and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which Web programs can run, in much the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment in which programs can run, on your computer. The output from these programs can then be viewed in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
When a Web server is "embedded," it resides on a hardware device (such as a printer) or in firmware, rather than being available as software that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that anyone who has a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser can use. There is no special software to install or configure. For more information about the HP embedded
Web server, see the Embedded Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the
CD-ROM that is included with the printer.
Features
Use the HP embedded Web server to view printer and network card status and manage printing functions from your computer. With the HP embedded Web server, you can do the following:
● View printer status information.
● Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
● View and change tray configurations.
● View and change the printer control panel menu configuration.
● View and print internal pages.
● Receive notification of printer and supplies events.
● Add or customize links to other Web sites.
● Select the language in which to show the embedded Web server pages.
● View and change network configuration.
HP Toolbox (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
The HP Toolbox is a software program that can be used for the following tasks:
● Check the printer status.
● View troubleshooting information.
● View online documentation.
● Print internal printer pages.
You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. You have to perform a complete software installation before you can use the HP Toolbox.
74
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Other components and utilities
Several software programs are available for Windows and Macintosh users, as well as for network administrators. These programs are summarized in the following table.
Windows Macintosh OS Network administrator
● Software installer — automates the printing system installation
● Online Web registration
● HP Toolbox (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models only)
● PostScript Printer
Description files (PPDs) — for use with the Apple
PostScript drivers that comes with the Mac OS
● HP LaserJet Utility
(available from the
Internet) — a printer management utility for Mac
OS users
● HP Toolbox (for Mac OS X
V10.2 and later; HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models only)
● HP Web Jetadmin — a browser-based system management tool. See
www.hp.com/go/ webjetadmin for the latest
HP Web Jetadmin software
● HP Jetdirect Printer
Installer for UNIX — available for download from
www.hp.com/support/ net_printing
ENWW Embedded Web server
75
Setting network security on the printer
This printer features control-panel locking, which allows network administrators to prevent users from changing certain printer control-panel settings. When a menu is locked, unauthorized users trying to change settings at the printer control panel will see the following message:
ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED
Administrators can use HP Web Jetadmin software, the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh, or an ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure. For instructions to lock the printer control panel by using either the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for
Macintosh, see the online Help.
Locking the control panel
Network administrators can prevent users from changing printer control-panel settings by establishing a password and locking the printer control panel. Administrators can choose from multiple levels of security and can lock certain control panel menus, allowing users to change the rest of the menus, or lock all of the menus (including the Cancel Job [HP Color
LaserJet 4600 models] or Stop [HP Color LaserJet 4650 models] button).
Levels of security
Lock setting
OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
Control panel items locked
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
I/O submenu
System setup submenu
Resets submenu
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
Configure Device menu (including all submenus)
Diagnostics menu
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
Information menu
Paper Handling menu
Configure Device menu (including all submenus)
Diagnostics menu
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
Cancel Job button (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Stop button (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
76
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Note
Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security
If you decide to use the ASCII escape sequence, you must use an MS-DOS or Windows
ASCII editor to create the commands. The commands must also be sent to the printer by using a DOS COPY command or an ASCII file download utility. The PJL Technical
Reference Manual is located on CD-ROM (part number 5961-0976). Order a copy of this manual from the HP Web site:
.
In the following examples, EC represents the escape character. For more information about using escape characters, see the PJL Technical Reference Manual.
● To lock or unlock the printer control panel if a password has not been set, send the following ASCII sequence to the printer:
EC%-12345x@PJL JOB
@PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK=NONE (or MINIMUM, MODERATE, or MAXIMUM)
@PJL EOJ
EC%-12345x
● To set the password, send the following ASCII sequence to the printer:
EC%-12345x@PJL JOB
@PJL DEFAULT PASSWORD=[numeric password (0 to 65535)]
@PJL EOJ
EC%-12345x
● To lock or unlock the control panel if the password has been set, send the following
ASCII sequence to the printer:
EC%-12345x@PJL JOB PASSWORD=(numeric password)
@PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK=NONE (or MINIMUM, MODERATE, or MAxIMUM)
@PJL EOJ
EC%-12345x
ENWW Setting network security on the printer
77
78
Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
4
Maintenance
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
Installing memory and font DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ............................93
ENWW
79
Cleaning the printer and accessories
WARNING!
CAUTION
Clean the outside surfaces with a water-dampened cloth. Observe the warning and caution below.
Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard. Be careful when cleaning around the fuser area. It might be hot.
To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
CAUTION
Component
Outside covers
Inside general
ETB attaching roller
Paper pickup rollers
Color registration detection unit
Cleaning Method
Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth (part number
5090-3379) or a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or ammonia-based cleaners.
With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any dust, spilled toner, and paper particles from the paper path area, the registration roller, and the print cartridge cavity.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Cleaning spilled toner
Defective print cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam has occurred, some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer. The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner. Use a vacume that is designed for picking up fine particles. See
When cleaning the printer, do not touch the ETB with the damp cloth or with your fingers.
Vacuum specifications
Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner using a conventional vacuum. Toner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums.
A vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine particles (5 microns in diameter).
80
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
You can identify supply items by their labeling and their blue plastic handles. For instructions about installing supplies, see the installation guides that come with each supply item.
The following table lists the approximate replacement intervals for printer supply items and shows the control panel messages that prompt you to replace each item.
Table 4-1. Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
Supply item
Black (K) print cartridge
Printer message Page counts
REPLACE
BLACK
CARTRIDGE
9,000 pages
2
Approximate replacement interval 1
2.7 months
Cyan (C) print cartridge
REPLACE CYAN
CARTRIDGE
8,000 pages
2
Magenta (M) print cartridge
REPLACE
MAGENTA
CARTRIDGE
Yellow (Y) print cartridge
REPLACE
YELLOW
CARTRIDGE
8,000 pages
2
8,000 pages 2
2.7 months
2.7 months
2.7 months
Image transfer kit
(ETB)
REPLACE
TRANSFER KIT
120,000 pages
3 40 months
To install or order
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
ENWW Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
81
CAUTION
Table 4-1. Approximate replacement intervals for supply items (continued)
Supply item Printer message Page counts Approximate replacement interval 1
To install or order
Image fuser kit
REPLACE
FUSER KIT
150,000 pages 3
50 months
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
1 Approximate life expectancies based on 3,000 pages per month.
2 The approximate average A4/Letter-size page count is based on 5% coverage of individual colors. Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
3 Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
Hewlett-Packard Company recommends the use of HP products in this printer. Use of non-
HP products can cause problems that require service that is not covered by the Hewlett-
Packard warranty or service agreements.
ETB life under different circumstances
Depending on the printer workload, the customer will need to replace the ETB once or twice in the life of the printer. In order to help plan supplies purchases, the HP Color LaserJet
4600 Series printer calculates an estimated remaining number of pages that can be printed with the ETB. This number appears on the Supplies Status page under Transfer Kit: HP Part
Number: HP C9724A for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or HP Q3675 for the HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models (for exchange part numbers, see chapter 8). You can view the
Supplies Status page by printing it from the printer control panel. If the printer is connected to the network, you can also view the page in your Web browser or through the HP Web
Jetadmin software.
The number of pages an ETB can print is a function of two factors:
● The number of times the belt goes from a stationary to a rotating state (spins up)
● The number of pages that have been printed on the belt
Unless print jobs are queued back to back, each print job requires the belt to spin up.
Think of the ETB as having a limited number of wear units. It has 200,000 wear units when it is new. Each time the belt spins up, it uses two wear units. Each time it prints a page, the belt uses one wear unit.
Because most print jobs are not queued, the average number of pages per job, or job length, is a factor in how fast the ETB will wear out. The shorter the average job, the more quickly the ETB will wear out.
82
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Figure 4-1. ETB total page count according to average job length shows how many pages
an ETB will print, given various average job lengths.
Figure 4-1.
ETB total page count according to average job length
The printer assumes an average print job length of three pages to estimate how many pages are remaining on the ETB. With an average job length of three pages, the ETB will print
120,000 pages.
If all print jobs are exactly three pages long, for each page printed the number of estimated pages remaining would decrease by one, beginning with the maximum 120,000 pages. If the job length is less than three pages, the estimated-pages-remaining number decreases more quickly than the rate at which the number of pages actually printed increases. If the job length is greater than three pages, the number of pages remaining decreases less quickly than the rate at which the actual number of pages printed increases.
ENWW Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
83
Locating supplies
Use
Figure 4-2. Location of supplies to locate each supply item.
Figure 4-2.
Location of supplies
1
2
3
Fuser
Print cartridges
Transfer unit (ETB)
84
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Replacing supply items
Use the following instructions to replace the supplies.
Changing print cartridges
Replace a print cartridge when a REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE message appears on the control-panel display. The control-panel display also indicates the color that should be replaced (unless a genuine HP cartridge is not currently installed).
1. Open the top cover. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull it down. The front cover opens as you pull down the transfer unit.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is punctured, print quality problems can result.
2. Remove the used print cartridge from the printer.
ENWW Replacing supply items
85
3. Remove the replacement print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling.
4. Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side.
5. Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock. Remove and discard the orange shipping lock.
86
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
6. Remove the inside sealing tape by pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out. Discard the tape.
7. Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge. Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely seated.
Note
8. Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
Replacing the transfer unit
Replace the transfer unit when a REPLACE TRANSFER KIT message appears on the control-panel display.
If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the control panel. See
Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life .
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Use the side handles to open the top cover.
ENWW Replacing supply items
87
3. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull it down. The front cover opens as you pull down the transfer unit.
4. Locate the blue release buttons on each side of the transfer unit (near the bottom of the transfer unit).
5. Grasp the transfer unit with two hands. Simultaneously press both of the blue buttons and slide the transfer unit out of the printer.
6. Remove the new transfer unit from the bag. Place the used transfer unit in the bag for recycling. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
88
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
7. Hold the transfer unit on either side. Guide the feet into the cups and slide the transfer unit into the printer.
ENWW
8. Close the transfer unit and front cover. Close the top cover and turn the printer on. After a short while a NEW TRANSFER KIT= message appears on the control-panel display.
9. Press to highlight YES.
10. Press to reset the transfer unit count.
11. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life
If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the control panel.
Use the following steps to calibrate the printer:
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight CALIBRATE NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or FULL
CALIBRATE NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models).
7. Press to select CALIBRATE NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or FULL
CALIBRATE NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models).
8. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Use the following steps to reset the transfer unit count:
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight RESETS.
5. Press to select RESETS.
6. Press to highlight RESET SUPPLIES.
Replacing supply items
89
Note
WARNING!
7. Press to select RESET SUPPLIES.
8. Press to highlight NEW TRANSFER KIT.
9. Press to select NEW TRANSFER KIT.
10. Press to highlight YES.
11. Press to reset the transfer unit count.
Replacing the fuser
Replace the fuser when a REPLACE FUSER KIT message appears on the control-panel display.
If you replace the fuser when it is not at the end of life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the fuser count through the control panel. See
Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life .
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Use the side handles to open the top cover.
The fuser might be hot. Wait 10 minutes before proceeding.
3. Completely loosen the blue thumb screws on each side of the fuser.
4. Grasp the ends and pull straight up to remove the fuser.
5. Remove the new fuser from the bag. Place the used fuser in the bag for recycling. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
90
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
6. Grasp the sides of the fuser and push down firmly into the printer.
7. Tighten the blue thumb screws.
ENWW
8. Close the top cover, and turn the printer on. After a short while, a NEW FUSER KIT= message appears on the control-panel display.
9. Press to highlight YES.
10. Press to reset the fuser count.
Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life
If you replace the fuser when it is not at the end of its life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to reset the fuser count through the control panel.
Use the following steps to reset the fuser count:
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 46500 printer) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight RESETS.
5. Press to select RESETS.
6. Press to highlight RESET SUPPLIES.
7. Press to select RESET SUPPLIES.
8. Press to highlight NEW FUSER KIT.
9. Press to select NEW FUSER KIT.
10. Press to highlight YES.
Replacing supply items
91
11. Press to reset the fuser count.
92
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Note
Note
The printer has five dual inline memory module (DIMM) slots.
For maximum flexibility in DIMM support, the formatter is designed with four 168-pin DIMM slots and a fifth 100-pin DIMM slot. Only four DIMMs can be loaded at a time, so the fifth
DIMM slot (100-pin) is logically the same as the fourth DIMM slot (168-pin). The system can only have a DIMM installed on the fourth DIMM slot (168-pin) if no DIMM is installed in the fifth DIMM slot (100-pin), and vice versa.
Use these DIMM slots to upgrade the printer with the following accessories:
● More printer memory - DIMMs are available in 64, 128, and 256 MB
● Flash memory DIMMs - available in 4 MB; unlike standard printer memory, flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the printer, even when the printer is off
● DIMM-based accessory fonts, macros, and patterns
● Other DIMM-based printer languages and printer options
Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) that were used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer.
Before ordering additional memory, print a configuration page to see how much memory is currently installed.
1. Press to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
CAUTION
Installing memory and font DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
You can install more memory for the printer, and you can also install a font DIMM so that the printer can print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet.
Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer.
1. Turn the printer off, and disconnect all power and interface cables. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
93
2. Remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and set them aside.
3. Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
4. Release the locks on each side of the DIMM slot.
5. Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notches on the bottom edge of the DIMM.
6. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notches on the DIMM with the bars in the
DIMM slot.
94
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Note
If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM or closing the latches, make sure that the notches on the bottom of the DIMM are aligned with the bars in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure that you are using the correct type of DIMM.
1. Firmly press the DIMM straight into the slot. Close the locks on each side of the DIMM until they snap into place.
ENWW
2. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and slide the board into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws that you removed in step 2.
3. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.
Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2. Select this printer and select Properties.
3. On the Configure tab, click More.
4. In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5. Click OK.
Enabling the language font DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
If you installed a language font DIMM in the printer, you must select the Font DIMM option in the printer driver in order for the font DIMM to work correctly. To enable fonts from the PCL
5c and PCL 6 printer drivers for Windows, follow this procedure:
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers.
2. Select this printer and select Properties.
3. On the Configure tab, click More.
4. Select the Font DIMM check box.
5. In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box, click Add to add the font file.
6. In the Add Font DIMM dialog box, browse to the location of the font file, select the font file, and then click OK.
7. In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box, select the installed DIMM.
8. Click OK.
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
95
Checking DIMM installation (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Verify that the DIMMs are installed correctly and are working.
1. Turn the printer on. Check that the Ready light is on after the printer has gone through the startup sequence. If an error message appears, a DIMM might be incorrectly installed.
2. Print a configuration page.
3. Check the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page and compare it with the configuration page that you printed before the DIMM installation.
4. If the amount of recognized memory has not increased, one of the following conditions might exist:
● The DIMM might not be installed correctly. Repeat the installation procedure.
● The DIMM might be defective. Try a new DIMM.
96
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Note
Note
Note
CAUTION
Note
The printer has two 200-pin DDR SDRAM slots. One slot is available for adding memory to the printer. DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules.
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models use 200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules
(SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.
The printer also has three flash memory card slots for printer firmware, fonts, and other solutions.
● The first flash memory card is reserved for printer firmware.
Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only. The slot is marked “Firmware Slot.”
● The two additional flash memory card slots allow the user to add fonts and third-party solutions, such as signatures and personalities. The slots are marked "Slot 2" and "Slot
3." For more information about the types of solutions available, go to
Flash memory cards adhere to Compact Flash specifications and size.
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you install a camera-type flash memory card, a message appears on the control-panel display asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be lost.
You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PS documents, or use many downloaded fonts. Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple, collated copies at the maximum speed.
Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that were used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer.
Before ordering additional memory, see how much is currently installed by printing a configuration page. To order additional memory, see chapter 8.
Printing a configuration page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1. Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to print the configuration page.
CAUTION
Installing memory and fonts (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
You can install more memory for the printer, and you can also install a font card so that the printer can print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet.
Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer.
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
97
To install DDR memory DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.
3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.
98
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
4. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and set them aside.
5. Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
6. To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot, lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.
ENWW
7. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM.
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
99
8. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible.
9. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.
Note
If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure that the notch on the bottom of the
DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure that you are using the correct type of DIMM.
100
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws removed in step 4.
11. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.
12. If you installed a memory DIMM, go to Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
101
CAUTION
To install a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1. Turn the printer off.
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you install a camera-type flash memory card, a message appears on the control-panel display asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be lost.
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.
3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.
102
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
4. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and set them aside.
5. Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
6. Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector and push it in the slot until it is fully seated.
CAUTION
Note
ENWW
Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle.
The first flash memory slot marked “Firmware Slot” is reserved for firmware only. Slots 2 and slot 3 should be used for all other solutions.
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
103
7. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws that you removed in step
4.
8. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.
Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.
To enable memory for Windows 98, ME, and NT (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. On the Configure tab, click More.
4. In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5. Click OK.
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3. On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).
4. Select the total amount of memory that is now installed, and then click OK .
104
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card
You can install an HP Jetdirect print server card in the base model printer, which comes with an open EIO slot.
1. Turn the printer off, and disconnect all power and interface cables.
2. Locate an empty EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot onto the printer, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and cover again.
Figure 4-3.
HP LaserJet 4600 models
Figure 4-4.
HP LaserJet 4650 models
ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card
105
3. Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot. Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.
Figure 4-5.
HP LaserJet 4600 models
Figure 4-6.
HP LaserJet 4650 models
4. Connect the network cable. Reconnect the power cable, and turn the printer on.
5. Print a configuration page. In addition to a printer configuration page, an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print. If it does not print, uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot.
6. Perform one of these steps:
● Select the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions.
● Reinstall the software, and select the network installation.
106
Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
5
Theory of operation
This chapter provides information about the following topics.
ENWW
107
Basic operation
The HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer functions are divided into four systems:
● Engine-control system
● Laser/scanner system
● Image-formation system
● Pickup/feed system
This chapter describes each of these systems thoroughly.
Figure 5-1.
Note
Basic system operation
Operation sequence
A microcomputer in the engine control system controls the operation sequence for the printer. The basic operation sequence (see
Table 5-1. Basic operation sequence ) describes
the main operational periods from the point when the printer is turned on until a print operation is completed and each motor stops rotating.
In the following table, “ETB” stands for “electrostatic transfer/transport belt.”
108
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Table 5-1. Basic operation sequence
Period
WAIT (wait period) From the time the power switch is turned on until the ETB cleaning is completed.
Purpose
To clear a potential on the drum surface and to clean the ETB.
STBY (standby period) From the end of the
WAIT or LSTR period or last rotation until the formatter inputs a print command or until the power is turned off.
INTR (initial rotations period)
From immediately after the formatter inputs a print command until the
TOP signal is sent to the formatter.
PRINT (print period) From the end of the
INTR period until the leading edge detection sensor detects paper and then turns off the transfer positive bias.
LSTR (last rotations period)
From the end of the
PRINT period until the
ETB motor stops.
To keep the printer ready to print.
To stabilize the photosensitive-drum sensitivity in preparation for a print operation.
To form an image on the photosensitive drum according to the video signal input from the formatter and to transfer the toner image to the paper.
To deliver the paper out of the printer and to clean the ETB.
Remark
During this period, the printer checks the toner level and detects whether the cartridges are present. The printer also executes the pulse width modulation adjustment, color registration adjustment, and image density calibration control as required.
When the formatter sends a sleep command, the printer enters PowerSave mode.
After the power is turned on, the cartridge is cleaned every 35 pages and the ETB is cleaned every 100 pages.
The last rotations period lasts until the instant the formatter sends a print command. Then the initial rotations period starts again.
Basic operation
109
Engine-control system
The engine control system is the brain of the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer. It controls all the other systems according to commands from the formatter. The engine control system consists of the following:
● DC controller PCA
● Fuser power supply PCA
● High-voltage PCA
● Low-voltage power supply unit
● Formatter
Each of these components is described in this chapter.
Figure 5-2.
Note
Engine control system
In this manual, the abbreviation "PCA" stands for "printed circuit board assembly."
Components described as a PCA can consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.
DC controller circuit
The DC controller controls the print operation sequence for the printer. The sequence of events is as follows:
1. Power is turned on.
2. The low-voltage power supply unit supplies dc power to the DC controller.
3. The CPU in the DC controller starts to control printer operations.
4. The printer enters the standby period.
5. Based on the print command and the image data input from the formatter, the CPU sends a signal to drive the laser diode, the motors, and the solenoids.
110
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Note
See the general circuit diagram for detailed information about the printer circuitry.
Figure 5-3.
ENWW
DC controller circuit
Motors, fans, and environment sensor
The printer has ten motors and two or three fans (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models have two fans; HP Color LaserJet 4650 models have three fans). HP Color LaserJet 4650 models also have one environment sensor. Eight of the motors are dc motors; the other two are stepping motors.
Figure 5-4. Motors and fans (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers)
and
5-5. Fan and environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
shows the locations of
the fan and sensor. Table 5-2. Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor explains
the function of each component.
Engine-control system
111
One of the stepping motors and six of the eight dc motors are used for paper feeding and image formation. The remaining stepping motor is the developing disengaging motor. The remaining two dc motors are fan motors.
Since the printer transfers an image in four colors in line onto the paper, small changes in the rotational speed of the motor are likely to cause color misalignment. The dc motors used for image formation are precisely controlled to account for rotational speed fluctuation.
Figure 5-4.
Motors and fans (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers)
Figure 5-5.
Fan and environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
112
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Table 5-2. Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor
Name
M1: Cyan cartridge motor
M2: Yellow cartridge motor
M3: Magenta cartridge motor
M4: Black cartridge motor
M5: Pickup motor
Function
Drives the photosensitive drum
Type
dc motor
Stepping motor
M6: ETB motor
Drives the pickup roller and feed roller
Drives the ETB dc motor
M7: Developing disengaging motor
M8: Fuser motor
FAN1: Formatter fan
FAN2: Cartridge fan
Separates the photosensitive drums and the developing cylinders
Stepping motor
Drives the pressure roller and delivery roller dc motor
Exhausts heat around the formatter and lowvoltage power supply unit dc motor
Exhausts heat around the fuser and cartridges dc motor
FAN 3: Power supply fan (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models only)
Environment sensor
( HP Color LaserJet
4650 models only)
Exhausts heat around the pickup motor and low-voltage power supply
Detects the temperature and humidity levels inside the printer dc motor
NA
Speed switching
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3,
1/4)
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3,
1/4)
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3,
1/4)
No
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3,
1/4)
2-speed (full during printing, 1/2 during standby)
No
(full speed during printing only)
No
(full speed during printing only)
NA
Engine-control system
113
Fuser power supply circuit
This printer uses an induction heating method to heat the fuser.
Figure 5-6. Fuser power supply circuit shows the configuration of the fuser power supply.
Figure 5-6.
Fuser power supply circuit
The fuser power supply has three main components:
● Fuser sleeve. A high-frequency current flows through an induction heating coil in the fuser sleeve, causing the metal sleeve to heat.
● Thermistors. Two thermistors are in the fuser sleeve: one in the center, and the other at the end. Each thermistor monitors the temperature in the fuser sleeve.
● Thermoswitch. The thermoswitch is located at the bottom center of the fuser sleeve.
When the fuser is overheating, the switch opens, and power to the induction heating coil is shut off.
Table 5-3. Fuser temperatures
Media
Plain
Overhead transparencies
Thick
Gloss
Envelopes
Temperature
~ 190°C (374°F)
~ 172°C (342°F) color
~ 185°C (365°F) monochrome
~ 185°C (365°F)
~ 167°C (333°F)
~ 190°C (374°F)
Engine speed
Full speed
1/4 speed
1/2 speed
1/2 speed
1/3 speed
Full speed
114
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Heater temperature control
The heater temperature control detects the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve and controls the current flowing to the induction heating coil. The heater temperature control
circuit is shown in Figure 5-7. Heater temperature control circuit .
Figure 5-7.
Note
ENWW
Heater temperature control circuit
The two thermistors that are attached to the fuser sleeve (TH1 and TH2) detect the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve. The main thermistor (TH1) controls the fuser temperature, and the sub thermistor (TH2) detects overheating at the end of the fuser sleeve. When the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve increases, resistance of the two thermistors is reduced, and the voltage of the main thermistor detection signal (MAINTH1) and the sub thermistor detection signal (SUBTH1) drops.
The CPU (IC1012) on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the MAINTH1 and SUBTH1 signals. The CPU sends the fuser temperature control signal (TMPCON) according to the voltage level.
The CPU sends the amperage control signal (PRANGE) to control the amperage of the fuser sleeve.
.
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models: During standby, the fuser temperature is maintained at about 170°F (76.7°C) to accommodate a first-print time of less than 15 seconds.
Engine-control system
115
High-voltage power supply
The high-voltage power supply circuit applies bias to the primary charging rollers, the toner charging rollers, the developing cylinders, the attaching roller, and the transfer charging rollers.
Figure 5-8. High-voltage power supply circuit shows the high-voltage power supply
circuit.
Figure 5-8.
High-voltage power supply circuit
Low-voltage power supply
The low-voltage power supply circuit converts the ac voltage that is input from the electrical outlet to dc power and delivers it to each load in the printer.
supplied to each component.
116
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
The ac power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply by turning on the power supply switch (SW5). The ac power is converted to the dc power that the printer requires:
● +24 V goes to the motors, solenoids, clutches, and the high-voltage power supply circuit.
● +5 V goes to the laser driver PCA, the beam detect PCA, and the formatter.
● +3.3 V goes to the formatter, the sensors, and the ICs in the DC controller PCA.
+24 V is divided into +24 VA, which is constantly sent from the low-voltage power supply circuit, and +24 VB, which stops power supply when the top cover or the front cover is opened. +24 VB goes to the fuser power supply circuit, high-voltage power supply circuit, and the motors and solenoids. +24 VB also functions as the door-open (/DOPEN) detection signal. The CPU detects the door open with the signal.
Figure 5-9.
ENWW
Low-voltage power supply circuit
Formatter system
The formatter PCA is responsible for the following actions:
● Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces
● Monitoring control panel inputs and relaying printer status information (through the control panel and the bidirectional I/O)
● Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine
● Storing font information
● Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface
● Controlling the PowerSave mode
Engine-control system
117
The formatter monitors the printer continuously through the video interface. When the printer is ready to print, the formatter sends a signal to the DC controller, which turns the laser on or off based on the signal.
Figure 5-10. Formatter system shows the formatter system.
Figure 5-10.
Note
Formatter system
PowerSave
This feature conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time.
Set the time length in the Configure Device menu, under System Setup. When the printer is in PowerSave mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the printer retains all printer settings, downloadable fonts, and macros. The default setting is POWERSAVE= ON, with a 30-minute idle time. You can turn PowerSave off in the Configure Device menu, under Resets.
The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs:
● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the parallel port, FIR port (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models), EIO card, or 1.1 USB connector (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models).
● A control panel button is pressed
● The top cover is opened
● A paper tray is opened
● The engine test button is pressed
Printer error messages override the PowerSave message. The printer enters PowerSave mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear.
118
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Input/Output
This section explains the printer input/output (I/O) capabilities.
Parallel interface
The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface (IEEE-1284). The I/O provides high-speed and two-way communication between the printer and the host, allowing the user to change printer settings and monitor printer status from the host computer. The user can configure the HIGH SPEED item on the control panel menu. (This item is found by navigating to the Configure Device menu, in the I/O menu, and Parallel Input.) The default setting, Yes, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers.
When set to No, the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible with older computers. The user can also configure the Advance Functions item. The default setting,
ON, allows for two-way parallel communications. The Off mode disables the advanced functionality. The I/O is compatible with the bidirectional parallel interface standard.
Expanded I/O (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
The optional HP Fast InfraRed receiver enables wireless printing from any IRDA-compliant portable device (such as a laptop computer) to the printer.
The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending infrared port within operating range. The connection can be blocked by objects such as a hand or paper, or by direct sunlight or any bright light shining into either infrared port.
USB 1.1 connector (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
The HP Color LaserJet 4650 models supports a USB 1.1 connector on the back of the printer. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable.
Flash
Optional flash is available in 4 MB flash memory DIMMs for storing forms, fonts, and signatures.
Hard-disk accessory
The optional hard-disk accessory can be mounted in one of the EIO slots on the rear of the formatter. The optional EIO-based hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints
(mopies) and storing forms, fonts, and signatures.
CPU
The HP LaserJet 4600 models formatter incorporates a 400 MHz RISC processor. The HP
LaserJet 4650 models formatter incorporates a 533 MHz RISC processor.
Printer memory
If the printer encounters difficulty managing available memory, a clearable warning message will appear on the control panel.
Engine-control system
119
Some printer messages are affected by the auto-continue and clearable warning settings from the Configure Device menu, under System Setup. If Clearable Warning = Job is set on the control panel, warning messages appear on the control-panel display until the end of the job from which they were generated. If Clearable Warning = On is set, warning messages appear on the control panel until (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) is pressed. If an error occurs that prevents printing and
Auto Continue = Off is set, the message appears until (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) is pressed.
Read-only memory
Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the read-only memory (ROM) stores dot patterns of internal character sets (fonts).
Random-access memory
The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter. Note that adding memory (DIMMs) might also increase the print speed for complex graphics.
DIMM slots (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer)
The DIMM slots can be used to add memory, fonts, or firmware upgrades.
Firmware DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
To upgrade printer firmware, install a new firmware DIMM (firmware DIMMs are flashable).
See
Installing memory and font DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) for more
information.
Flash memory (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
To upgrade printer firmware, install a new firmware Compact FLASH. See
Installing memory and fonts (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
for more information.
Nonvolatile memory
The printer uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected.
120
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
PJL overview
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, PJL allows the printer to perform functions such as the following:
● Two-way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection. The printer can tell the host about such things as the control-panel settings, and the control-panel settings can be changed from the host.
● Dynamic I/O switching allows the printer to be configured with a host on each I/O. The printer can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur even when the printer is offline.
● Context-sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically recognize the personality
(PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.
● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for landscape printing.
PML
The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status readback through the I/O ports.
Control panel
The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from a control panel board.
ENWW Engine-control system
121
Laser/scanner assembly
The laser/scanner system receives a signal from the formatter and forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge. The printer has a separate laser/scanner unit for each color. Each of these has the same structure, which is shown in
Figure 5-11. Laser/ scanner system .
Figure 5-11.
Laser/scanner system
Scanner-motor control
The scanner-motor control rotates the scanner motor in order to place the laser beam at the correct position on the photosensitive drum.
Figure 5-12. Scanner-motor control circuit
shows the circuit diagram for the scanner-motor control.
122
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Note
If a scanner-motor error occurs, the print engine stops and an error message appears on the control-panel display.
Figure 5-12.
Scanner-motor control circuit
ENWW Laser/scanner assembly
123
Image-formation system
The image-formation system is the central hub of the printer.
toner is formed and then fused onto the paper. The image-formation system consists of the following components:
● Four laser/scanners
● Four print cartridges
● ETB
● Fuser
Figure 5-13.
Image-formation system
Image-formation process
The image-formation process consists of eleven steps divided among five functional blocks:
● Electrostatic latent-image formation block
● Developing block
● Transfer block
124
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
● Fusing block
● Cleaning block
Figure 5-14. Image-formation process
illustrates the overall image-formation process. The image-formation process steps are numbered from start to finish. The following sections in this chapter describe the five functional blocks in the image-formation process.
Figure 5-14.
Image-formation process
ENWW Image-formation system
125
Print cartridges
The printer has four different print cartridges, one for each color. However, they share the same structure, shown in
Figure 5-15. Print cartridge .
Figure 5-15.
Print cartridge
The following are the physical components inside the print cartridge:
● Photosensitive drum
● Primary charging roller
● Developing cylinder
● Toner charging roller
● Stirrers
● Waste-toner transfer plate
The photosensitive drum rotation drives the primary charging roller. All other components are driven by the drum motor.
The developing disengaging motor drives the developing disengaging block, which causes the developing cylinder to engage with or disengage from the photosensitive drum.
The DC controller uses an LED and a photo diode to monitor the level of toner inside the cartridge. It stores this information on a memory tag that is built into each cartridge.
126
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Memory tag
The memory tag is an EEP-ROM that is built into the print cartridge. It stores information about the amount of toner in the cartridge and estimates the remaining life.
Memory tag illustrates how the memory tag operates.
Figure 5-16.
ENWW
Memory tag
The DC controller reads information from the memory tag whenever the printer is turned on, whenever the top cover is closed, and whenever it receives a READ command from the formatter.
The DC controller writes information to the memory tag at specified times during a print operation and whenever it receives a WRITE command from the formatter.
If the DC controller is unable to either read to or write from the memory tag four times in a row, the DC controller alerts the formatter of a memory tag abnormality.
Toner-level detection
The printer monitors print-cartridge life in several ways to ensure continued high print quality:
● The number of developer rotations measures the usefulness (charge) of the toner.
● The toner sensor monitors remaining toner, and informs the user of toner "low" or "out" conditions.
● The number of photosensitive drum rotations measures the life of the photosensitive drum, which degrades slightly with each rotation.
The cartridge life, represented on the supplies status page and in the gauges on the control panel, is a combination of all three of these components. The lowest remaining percent is the number reported to the customer. However, information about which of these components is low or out is not reported.
During the life of a print cartridge, the customer receives three different control panel messages:
● OK. The cartridge has between 15% and 100% life remaining.
● Order cartridge. The cartridge has 15% life remaining. In typical printing situations, this represents about 2 weeks of use.
● Replace cartridge. One of the three components listed above has reached its end of life. The printer stops, and printing cannot continue until the cartridge is replaced.
Developer rotations
The developer-roller rotations are tracked on the print cartridge memory tag (e-label).
Tracking rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the developer or toner is actually worn out, which would result in print-quality defects.
Image-formation system
127
Over time, the toner loses its required properties as a result of excessive stirring and recharging. Although the cartridge will correctly signal LOW or OUT because of wear, some toner might remain in the fresh-toner hopper.
In addition to toner wear, the developer roller wears during use, so developer-life tracking is necessary. In situations where low-coverage documents are printed frequently, the developer rotations might cause a LOW signal before the toner level reaches its low level.
Toner sensor
For the first 75% of the cartridge life, toner depletion within the cartridge is calculated by counting pixels. An optical toner-level sensor then tracks the final 25% of toner. The toner is measured and then reported on the toner gas gauge on the control panel or on the supplies status page. The transition from counting pixels to optical toner-level sensing causes no fluctuations on the toner gauge. Some toner might remain in the fresh-toner hopper although other cartridge components have reached their end of life.
Photosensitive drum rotations
Photosensitive drum rotations are also tracked on the cartridge memory tag. Similar to the process for the developer roller, tracking these rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the photosensitive drum is actually worn out, when print quality defects would occur. Wear on the photosensitive drum might cause a low message when low-coverage documents are printed frequently. Tracking of drum life is essential because of drum wear and the potential for overflow from the waste-toner hopper if use of the photosensitive drum is overextended.
Figure 5-17. Toner-level detection illustrates the toner-level detection system.
Figure 5-17.
Toner-level detection
128
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Developing cylinder disengaging control
Whenever the developing cylinder is in contact with the photosensitive drum, toner passes onto the drum. At certain times, such as during ETB cleaning or during monochrome printing, toner should not pass onto the drum, and the developing cylinder should not be in contact with the drum. The bottom half of the print cartridge can pivot up and down, causing the developing cylinder to either come in contact with or move away from the photosensitive drum. A small block inside the printer causes each cartridge to pivot. When the block is pushed up, the rear of the cartridge is pushed up, and the front of the cartridge swings down.
The developing cylinder disengages from the drum.
Figure 5-18. Developing cylinder disengaging illustrates this process.
Figure 5-18.
Developing cylinder disengaging
The developing cylinders are disengaged only during monochrome printing or during ETB cleaning. During monochrome printing, the developing cylinder in all cartridges (except the black cartridge) is disengaged. During ETB cleaning, the developing cylinders in all cartridges are disengaged.
ENWW Image-formation system
129
Electrostatic transfer/transport belt (ETB) unit
The ETB unit feeds the media through the printer and helps transfer toner onto the media.
illustrates the ETB unit.
Figure 5-19.
ETB unit
The following are the components of the ETB unit:
● ETB belt
● ETB feed roller
● Attaching roller
● Transfer charging rollers (four)
● ETB-driven rollers (three)
The ETB motor drives the ETB feed roller, causing the belt to rotate. All other rollers are driven by the belt rotation.
A sensor at the top of the ETB unit detects its speed. The DC controller maintains a constant
ETB feed speed to ensure good color registration.
130
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Electrostatic-latent-image-formation block
The image formation process begins in the electrostatic-image formation block (see Figure
5-14. Image-formation process ), where the electrostatic latent image is formed on the
photosensitive drum. This block consists of three steps:
● Primary exposure
● Primary charging
● Laser-beam exposure
After the last step is complete, areas of the drum surface that have not been exposed to the laser beam retain a negative charge. The areas that have been exposed to the laser are neutralized. This neutralized image is called an electrostatic latent image because it is invisible to the eye.
Step 1: Primary exposure
To prepare for primary charging, light from the primary exposure LED strikes the photosensitive drum surface. This eliminates any residual charge on the drum surface in order to avoid inconsistent charge density.
illustrates this step.
Figure 5-20.
Primary exposure
ENWW Image-formation system
131
Step 2: Primary charging
To prepare for latent-image formation, a uniform negative potential is applied to the photosensitive drum surface. The primary charging roller is made of a conductive rubber. A dc bias is applied to the primary charging roller to maintain uniform potential on the drum
surface. Figure 5-21. Primary charging illustrates this step.
Figure 5-21.
Primary charging
Step 3: Laser beam exposure
As the laser beam scans the drum surface it neutralizes the negative charge to form the the electrostatic latent image. The remaining areas, where the laser beam has not struck, retain
a negative charge. Figure 5-22. Laser beam exposure illustrates this step.
Figure 5-22.
Laser beam exposure
132
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Development block
The second part of the image-formation process is the development block, where toner is transferred onto the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum to create a visible image. This printer uses a contact development method that keeps the developing cylinder in contact with the drum, pushing the toner against the drum surface for development. The toner is non-magnetic and consists of resins. This block consists of two steps:
● Toner charging
● Development
Figure 5-23. Development block shows a cross-section of a print cartridge and illustrates the
development block.
Figure 5-23.
Development block
Step 4: Toner charging
As the toner stirring blade turns inside the cartridge, the friction creates a negative potential on the toner. A negative voltage is applied to the toner charging roller and creates a uniform negative potential on the toner.
Step 5: Development
The areas on the photosensitive drum that have been exposed to the laser beam have a higher potential (are less negatively charged) than the toner particles on the developing cylinder. As the photosensitive drum rotates, the toner adheres to the exposed areas on the photosensitive drum. At this point, the image is visible on the drum surface.
ENWW Image-formation system
133
Transfer block
The third part of the image-formation process is the transfer block, in which the toner image is transferred from the photosensitive drum to the paper. This block consists of three steps:
● Attaching
● Transfer
● Separation
Step 6: Attaching
After the media is picked up from the input tray, the attaching roller pushes it against the
ETB. The attaching roller has a positive dc bias, and it creates a positive charge on the print media.
Figure 5-24. Attaching the paper to the ETB illustrates this step.
Figure 5-24.
Attaching the paper to the ETB
Step 7: Transfer
A positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller, which is directly opposite the photosensitive drum. As the ETB passes the transfer charging roller, it picks up a positive charge. The negatively charged toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the
positively charged print media. Figure 5-25. Toner transfer illustrates this step. This process
is repeated for each color as the ETB carries the media from the bottom cartridge to the top
(C, Y, M, K).
134
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
In four-color printing, as four colors of toner are piled up on the media, the holding force of the toner weakens as the transfer process progresses. To counteract this effect, the DC controller increases the positive dc bias that is applied to the transfer charging roller for each successive color.
Figure 5-25.
Toner transfer
Step 8: Separation
The elasticity of the print media causes it to separate from the ETB as the ETB reaches the top of its path.
Figure 5-26. Separation illustrates this step.
Figure 5-26.
Separation
Fusing block
The fourth part of the image-formation process is the fusing block, in which the toner image is fused to the media, making a permanent image that cannot be smeared. This block consists of one step: fusing.
ENWW Image-formation system
135
Step 9: Fusing
This printer uses the induction heating method to fuse the toner to the media. This method uses quick fuser heating, resulting in shortened wait time and reduced power consumption.
Figure 5-27. Fusing illustrates this step.
Figure 5-27.
Fusing
Cleaning block
The fifth and final part of the image-formation process is the cleaning block, in which the
ETB and the photosensitive drums are cleaned, preparing them for the next print. The next section provides more information about printer calibration and cleaning. This block consists of two steps:
● ETB cleaning
● Photosensitive drum cleaning
Step 10: ETB cleaning
See
ETB cleaning for a complete discussion of ETB cleaning.
Step 11: Photosensitive drum cleaning
See
for a complete discussion of photosensitive drum cleaning.
Calibration and cleaning
The printer automatically calibrates and cleans itself at various times to maintain the best print quality. You can also force the printer to calibrate by selecting Calibrate Now (HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models), Quick Calibrate Now, or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models) from the Print Quality menu. For information about calibrating the printer. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Color LaserJet 4650 models) or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
for more information.
136
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
While the printer is calibrating or cleaning, it pauses printing. For most calibrations and cleaning, the printer does not interrupt a print job, but waits for the job to be complete before calibrating or cleaning.
Table 5-4. Calibration timing and duration shows when the printer
calibrates, the duration of the calibration, and the type of calibration that occurs.
shows when the printer cleans and the duration of the cleaning. The sections that follow discuss calibration and cleaning in more detail.
Table 5-4. Calibration timing and duration
Calibration occurrence
When you turn the printer on.
Duration
75 seconds for calibration, but because of other initialization activities, the printer takes a total of 2 minutes to be ready for printing
150 seconds (2 minutes, 30 seconds)
When you install one or more print cartridges that have not previously been installed in the printer.
When 50 pages have been printed since installing a print cartridge. The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating.
When 1,000 pages have printed since the last calibration. The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating.
When 8 hours have passed since the last calibration, but not while the printer is in
PowerSave mode. Typically, this calibration occurs during the first job or any control-panel interaction after an overnight idle period.
When you request calibration from the control panel
(CALIBRATE NOW for HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models or
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW and
FULL CALIBRATE NOW for
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models).
75 seconds
75 seconds
75 seconds
280 seconds (4 minutes, 40 seconds)
Type of calibration
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF, color-plane registration (CPR)
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF, CPR, drum phase
Table 5-5. Cleaning timing and duration
Cleaning occurrence
When the printer continuously prints (with no idle period or spin down) for 51 pages.
Duration Type of cleaning
either 5 seconds or 21 seconds
(5 seconds is the most common) primary and toner charging rollers
Image-formation system
137
Table 5-5. Cleaning timing and duration (continued)
Cleaning occurrence Duration
At intervals of 90 and 140 pages. The printer will finish printing the current job before cleaning.
16 seconds
Type of cleaning
ETB
ETB cleaning
During this step, all toner particles that remain on the ETB are returned to the photosensitive drums in each print cartridge.
Figure 5-28. ETB cleaning illustrates this step.
The ETB is automatically cleaned when the printer is turned on, when the covers are closed, and after printing a specified number of pages. The DC controller applies negative bias to the photosensitive drums and either a positive or negative bias to the transfer charging rollers. This creates a difference in potential between the photosensitive drums and the ETB.
Both positive and negative residual toner returns to the photosensitive drums.
Figure 5-28.
ETB cleaning
138
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Photosensitive drum cleaning
A cleaning blade inside the print cartridge clears the remaining toner on the photosensitive drum as the drum rotates past the blade. This waste toner is moved into the waste-toner
container in the top of the print cartridge. Figure 5-29. Drum cleaning illustrates this step.
Figure 5-29.
Drum cleaning
During the printing process, toner adheres to the primary charging roller and the toner charging roller. To prevent print quality defects, this toner needs to be cleaned. The DC controller alternately applies negative bias in different values to the primary charging roller and the toner charging roller when one of the following occurs:
● The printer is turned on
● The covers are closed
● At the start of a print operation
● After printing a specified number of pages
Applying bias removes the toner from each roller. The toner on the primary charging roller is transferred to the photosensitive drum, and the toner on the toner charging roller is transferred to the developing cylinder. Then the cleaning blade scrapes the toner on the photosensitive drum into the waste-toner container, as described above. The toner on the developing cylinder is returned to the toner case.
Figure 5-30. Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning
illustrates this process.
Figure 5-30.
ENWW
Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning
Image-formation system
139
Color-plane registration calibration
The diameter of the rollers in individual print cartridges or ETB units varies from one to another. For this reason, whenever a new print cartridge or ETB unit is installed, the printer must adjust the rotational speed of the rollers in order to ensure good color-plane registration. Color misregistration occurs when the individual colors do not print directly on top of one another. This adjustment consists of two steps:
1. Direct calibration. The DC controller uses the color-registration detection unit to measure the color-registration range directly and calibrate the color registration.
2. Indirect calibration. The DC controller monitors the rotational speed of each feed roller and controls the speed to prevent color misregistration.
Figure 5-31. Color registration calibration
illustrates this process.
Figure 5-31.
Color registration calibration
Drum phase calibration
The drum phase calibration aligns all four cartridge motors and their drive gears.
140
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Image stabilization control
This controls the variation of the image density caused by an environmental change or deterioration of the photosensitive drum, toner, etc.
There are three types of image stabilization control. These controls operate when necessary.
● Environmental change control: The environment condition sensor (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models) controls the bias according to the environment conditions.
● Image density control (D-max): the color misregistration sensor (PS12) calibrates the bias value when the image density is at max.
● Image halftone control (D-half): The color misregistration sensor (PS12) calibrates the halftone data in the formatter.
Environmental change control (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
This control calibrates each bias to obtain the best image possible according to environmental changes.
The environment conditions sensor detects the temperature and the humidity. The sensor sends this information to the DC controller in the form of the Temperature Detection signal
(TEMSNS) and the Humidity Detection signal (HUMSNS).
The DC controller monitors the environmental conditions of the printer based on these two signals.
The DC controller controls the following biases to prevent image defects when it detects an environmental change.
● Developing bias
● Primary transfer bias
● Secondary transfer bias
If the environment sensor detects a temperature of below -30ºC (22ºF)or over 80ºC (176ºF), the DC controller determines this is an "environment sensor abnormality" and sends an error message to the formatter.
Image density calibration control (DMAX)
This control stabilizes image density by calibrating the values of the developing bias whenever one of the following events occurs:
● When the printer is turned on
● When a print cartridge is replaced
● After a set number of pages have printed
● When the formatter sends an operation command
Image density calibration consists of three steps:
1. The DC controller forms density patterns for each color on the ETB by using varying levels of developing bias.
2. The color registration detection unit measures the image density of the density patterns that are formed on the ETB.
3. The DC controller uses the density measurements to adjust the developing bias to obtain he correct image density.
Image-formation system
141
Image halftone calibration control (DHALF)
This control measures halftone density output from the formatter and returns the measurements to the formatter so it can perform halftone calibration. Image density calibration must always be performed in advance of image halftone calibration.
Image halftone calibration control consists of three steps:
1. Using the optimum developing bias determined during image density calibration, the DC controller forms density patterns on the photosensitive drum in each color cartridge.
2. These density patterns are transferred to the ETB, and the color-registration detection unit measures the image density of these patterns. Image data is returned to the formatter.
3. The formatter uses the image data to perform a halftone calibration in order to obtain an ideal halftone image.
Image density detection
Each of the image stabilization controls uses the color registration unit at the top of the ETB unit to measure image density. The DC controller emits a light from sensors located above the density detection patterns on the ETB. The light reflected off the patterns is returned to
When the values that the density sensor detects are outside the specified range, the DC controller resets the image density and issues an “image density sensor out of guaranteed range” warning to the formatter.
142
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
If the sensor receives no reflected light, the DC controller stops the printer and issues a
“density sensor abnormality” warning to the formatter.
Figure 5-32.
Image density detection
ENWW Image-formation system
143
Pickup/feed system
Note
The pickup/feed system picks media from the input trays and carries it along the paper path.
The printer has one multipurpose tray (tray 1) and one 500-sheet cassette (tray 2). A second
500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) is available for the HP Color LaserJet 4600, 4600n, 4650,
4650n, and 4650dn models; it is standard on the 4600dn, 4600dtn, 4600hdn, 4650dtn models. The HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn has 2 x 500-sheet feeder (tray 3/4) assembly.
Sensors detect the presence of media in each of these trays. Switches detect the size of the media. Motors and solenoids drive the various feed rollers.
The 2 x 500-sheet feeder is only available for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
144
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Three photo sensors detect the progress of media along the paper path. If media does not reach or pass one of these sensors within a specified time, the DC controller determines a
jam and notifies the formatter. Figure 5-33. Pickup/feed system illustrates this system.
Figure 5-33.
Pickup/feed system
ENWW Pickup/feed system
145
The pickup/feed system has the following physical components:
● PS1: Cassette paper sensor
● PS2: Multipurpose tray paper sensor
● PS3: Paper leading edge sensor (top of page)
● PS4: OHT sensor
● PS11: Fuser inlet paper sensor
● PS12: Fuser delivery sensor
● PS13: output bin full sensor
● SW1: Cassette paper size detection switch
● SW2: Cassette paper size detection switch
● SW3: Cassette paper size detection switch
● M1: Cyan drum motor
● M2: Yellow drum motor
● M3: Magenta drum motor
● M4: Black drum motor
● M5: Pickup motor
● M6: ETB motor
● M8: Fuser motor
● SL1: Cassette pickup solenoid
● SL2: Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid
146
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 5-34. Pickup/feed system
illustrates the pickup/feed system, which can be divided into three units:
● Pickup/feed unit. From the point the media is picked from the tray until it reaches the fuser
● Fuser/delivery unit. From the fuser to the output bin
● Duplex feed unit. From the output bin to the registration shutter at the bottom of the ETB
Figure 5-34.
Pickup/feed system
Pickup/feed unit
At the bottom of the paper path, the pickup unit picks individual pieces of media from the trays. Then the ETB carries the media to the top of the paper path. The following sequence of events occurs:
1. The formatter sends a print command to the DC controller, which rotates the pickup motor, the drum motors, the ETB motor, and the fuser motor.
2. The cassette feed roller and registration roller rotate as the pickup motor starts to rotate.
3. Media is picked from the cassette or multipurpose tray. A separation claw in the cassette prevents picking multiple sheets of media. A separation pad in the multipurpose tray prevents multiple sheets from feeding.
4. The registration shutter corrects any skew in the media, and the media is fed at a specified speed, according to the size and type of the media.
5. As the ETB carries the media past each print cartridge, toner is transferred onto the media.
ENWW Pickup/feed system
147
Cassette detection and cassette paper size detection
The printer can sense whether the cassette (tray 2) is installed correctly, and it can sense the size of the paper in the cassette. Paper-size detection switches at the back of the cassette send this information to the DC controller. The DC controller determines which size is loaded by reading various switches. See
Table 5-6. Cassette paper size detection
.
5-35. Cassette paper-size detection switches
shows how the switches are stacked.
Table 5-6. Cassette paper size detection
Paper size
A4
B5
A5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Custom
No cassette on off off off
Paper-size detection switch
SW1 SW2 on on off on on off on off off on off on on on off on off
SW3 off off on
Although the cassette determines the paper size by reading the switches, it is possible that the user can select a different size from what is loaded, creating an error in paper-size detection.
The paper leading-edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet pass it. By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge, the sensor can determine the actual size of the sheet. If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination, the DC controller determines a mismatch. The sheet is ejected from the printer, and the printer stops.
Figure 5-35.
Cassette paper-size detection switches
Overhead transparency detection
In order to prevent print-quality problems, the printer prints more slowly on overhead transparencies (OHT) than on plain paper. A sensor above the paper leading edge sensor detects an OHT and signals the DC controller to slow the motors accordingly.
148
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
The OHT sensor uses a light-transmitter and light-receiver to detect the presence of plain paper. When plain paper passes through the sensor, the light is blocked, and the OHT signal changes from low to high. Consequently, when the signal is not blocked, but the paper leading-edge sensor detects a sheet, the DC controller determines that the media is an
OHT.
Figure 5-36. Overhead transparency detection
illustrates this process.
Figure 5-36.
Overhead transparency detection
ENWW Pickup/feed system
149
Small-size paper detection
Because the printer's overhead transparency detection sensor is installed at the end of the feed path, small-size paper that does not pass the edge of the feed path can be mistaken for an OHT. To avoid this problem, the printer has a lever in front of the OHT detection sensor to distinguish small-sized paper. Small-size paper is too narrow to trip the lever. When the lever is tripped, the flag attached to the lever momentarily blocks light from reaching the
OHT detection sensor, indicating that the media is full width. The DC controller determines whether the media is an OHT or a sheet of paper based on whether the OHT sensor remains shaded from light as the media passes through. If the lever is not triggered, the DC controller determines that the media is small-size paper.
Figure 5-37. Small-size paper detection illustrates this process.
Figure 5-37.
Small-size paper detection
Feed speed control
The type of media in the paper path dictates the speed at which it is fed. The DC controller can change the feed speed according to type of media.
Table 5-7. Feed speed according to media
shows the relationship between media type and feed speed.
Table 5-7. Feed speed according to media
Feed mode
Normal mode
OHT mode
Thick 1 mode
Media type
Plain paper
Print mode
Full color
Monochrome
Overhead transparency Full color
Thick paper
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Feed speed
normal
1/4 speed
1/2 speed
1/2 speed
150
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Table 5-7. Feed speed according to media (continued)
Feed mode Media type Print mode
Thick 2 mode Thick paper
Gloss 1 mode
Gloss 2 mode
Image mode (high glossy mode; CLJ
4650)
Gloss film mode
Glossy paper
Glossy paper
Glossy paper
Glossy film
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Envelope mode
Thick paper mode
Label paper mode
Auto mode
Envelope
Thick paper
Adhesive labels
● Plain paper
● OHT
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Feed speed
1/2 speed (CLJ 4600)
1/3 speed (CLJ 4650)
1/3 speed
1/3 speed
1/4 speed
1/3 speed (CLJ 4600)
1/4 speed (CLJ 4650) normal normal
1/2 speed
Automatically adjusts for media
The DC controller determines a media mismatch, ejects the media, and stops the printer in the following situations:
● When OHT is detected and the printer is set to either thick paper or gloss mode
● When plain paper is detected and the printer is set to OHT mode
However, if the printer is set to plain-paper mode and OHT is detected, the DC controller will automatically switch the printer to OHT mode, and printing continues normally.
Fuser/delivery unit
The fuser/delivery unit consists of the fuser, which melts the toner and presses it onto the media, and the delivery unit, which feeds the sheets into the output bin. The sequence of events is as follows:
1. The ETB carries a sheet of media with transferred toner into the fuser.
2. The fuser motor adjusts its speed to maintain even tension on the media as it enters the fuser.
3. The fuser melts the individual toner particles. The fuser sleeve and pressure roller mix the liquefied toner and press it onto the media to create the appropriate color.
4. The media passes from the fuser into the output bin.
Pickup/feed system
151
Note
A sensor in the output bin detects when the bin is full. The DC controller will stop the printer after the current print job is complete.
Duplex feed unit
During two-sided (duplex) printing, the duplex feed unit retrieves the paper from the output bin and sends it back through the pickup/feed unit to print on the second side. The sequence of events is as follows:
1. The paper, with the front side printed, passes through the fuser.
2. The fuser motor (M8) rotates counterclockwise for a specified length of time after the paper reaches the fuser delivery sensor. The fuser delivery roller reverses direction and feeds the paper into the duplex feed unit.
Figure 5-38. Duplex switch back
illustrates this
"switch back" operation.
3. The oblique roller and feed roller feed the left edge of the paper so that it contacts the left-side plate in order to align the paper on the left margin.
4. The paper then re-enters the pickup/feed unit and the second side is printed.
5. The paper passes through the fuser a second time and comes to rest in the output bin.
During duplex printing, the printer prints the second side of the page first. For instance, if a four-page print job is to be printed on two sheets of paper, pages 2 and 4 print first, and then pages 1 and 3 print. For this reason, when preprinted letterhead is used for duplex printing, be sure to load the letterhead face-down in tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/4, and load letterhead face-up in tray 1.
Figure 5-38.
Duplex switch back
152
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
500-sheet paper feeder
The HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn, 4600hdn and 4650dtn printer models come standard with an additional 500-sheet paper feeder. It is an option for all other models. This additional tray
(tray 3) operates in the same way as tray 2. Figure 5-39. Additional 500-sheet paper feeder
shows the paper path with the additional 500-sheet paper feeder installed.
Figure 5-39.
Additional 500-sheet paper feeder
Pickup and feed operations
The following is the sequence of operations for the 500-sheet paper feeder.
Figure 5-40. 500sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation illustrates this sequence.
1. The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver.
2. The paper feeder driver rotates the main motor (M4001) in the paper feeder, and the feed roller starts to rotate.
3. After the printer enters the Scanner Ready state, the DC controller instructs the paper feeder driver to pick a sheet of media. The paper feeder pickup solenoid (SL4001) turns on. The pickup roller makes one rotation and picks up media from the paper feeder.
4. Separation pads eliminate extra sheets, and a single piece of media enters the feed path.
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder
153
Note
Paper-size detection for the 500-sheet feeder is the same as that described in
Cassette detection and cassette paper size detection . For the 500-sheet feeder, SW4001, SW4002,
and SW4003 are the equivalent of SW1, SW2, and SW3, respectively, in the 500-sheet cassette.
Figure 5-40.
500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation
154
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
2 x 500-sheet feeder
The optional 2 x 500-sheet feeder (available for HP Color LaserJet 4650 models; standard on the 4650hdn printer) is provides two 500-sheet casettes that accept a variety of paper types and sizes. Each cassette can hold 56 mm (2.2 inches) of 80 g/m 2 media (about 500 sheets).
Figure 5-41.
ENWW
2 x 500-sheet feeder
Pickup and feed system
The following is the sequence of operations for the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (the sequence of operation is the same for either cassette).
Figure 5-42. 2 x 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed operation
illustrates this sequence.
1. The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver.
2. The paper feeder driver rotates the main motor (M1) in the paper feeder, and the feed roller starts to rotate.
2 x 500-sheet feeder
155
3. After the printer enters the SCANNER READY state, the DC controller instructs the paper feeder driver to pick a sheet of paper. The paper feeder pickup solenoid (SL1 for tray 3; SL2 for tray 4) turns on. The pickup roller makes one rotation and picks up paper in the cassette.
156
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
4. Separation pads eliminate any extra sheets, and a single piece of paper enters the feed path.
Figure 5-42.
2 x 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed operation
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet feeder
157
Cassette detection and cassette paper-size detection
The printer can sense whether the cassette (tray 3/4) is installed correctly, and it can sense the size of the paper in the cassettes. Paper-size detection switches at the back of the cassettes send this information to the DC controller. The DC controller determines which
Table 5-8. Cassette paper size detection (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
Paper size
A4
B5
A5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Custom
No cassette on off off off
Paper-size detection switch
SW1 SW2 on on off on on off on off off on off on on on off on off
SW3 off off on
Although the cassette determines the paper size by reading the switches, it is possible that the user can select a different size from what is loaded, creating an error in paper-size detection.
The paper leading-edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet of paper pass it. By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge, the sensor determines the actual size of the sheet. If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination, the DC controller determines a mis-match. The sheet is ejected from the printer, and the printer stops.
Figure 5-43.
Cassette paper size detection switches (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
158
Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
6
Removal and replacement
This chapter contains information about the following topics.
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .........................175
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly .......................................230
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper sensor ..............................233
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper detection switch ...............234
ENWW
159
Introduction
WARNING!
This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components. (HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level.) This chapter includes exploded-view illustrations of the printer and paper-handling accessories. If an assembly or part does not have a reference number in the illustration and is not listed in the parts list, it is not a field replaceable unit (FRU).
Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included.
The information in this section is intended for authorized service personnel only.
WARNING!
Repair notices
Turn the printer off, wait five seconds, and then unplug the power cord before servicing the printer. Failure to completely disconnect the printer can result in severe injury.
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser/ scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
Never operate the printer with any parts removed.
The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet-metal parts.
Caution regarding electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Watch for the
ESD reminder when removing printer parts. Protect the PCA parts with protective ESD pouches.
Always use an ESD protected work station when servicing the printer or paper-handling accessories. If an ESD work station is not available, ground yourself to discharge body static by touching the metal chassis of the printer or accessory.
Required tools
Before servicing the printer, gather the following tools:
● Phillips #2 magnetized screwdriver (152-mm [6-inch] shaft)
● Small flat-blade screwdriver
● Small needle-nose pliers
● ESD strap
● Penlight (optional)
160
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
All components in the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer use Phillips-head screws that require a #2 Phillips screwdriver. Make sure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a
Posidriv screwdriver. Figure 6-1. Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison shows the
difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver. The surfaces on a Phillips tip are more beveled surfaces.
Figure 6-1.
Phillips and Posidriv screwdriver comparison
Types of screws
Table 6-1. Types of screws describes the screws used in the printer and provides guidelines
to help determine where to use each type of screw. The screws vary in length depending on the thickness of the material being fastened.
Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location.
Table 6-1. Types of screws
Illustration Description
Screw, machine with washer
M3x8 part number xA9-1276-000CN
Screw, self tapping
Uses
To hold plastic to metal.
For example: printer covers
Screw, truss head
M3x6 part number xA9-1275-000CN
To hold plastic to plastic.
For example: printer cover to a plastic hinge
To hold sheet metal to sheet metal.
For example: formatter cage
ENWW Introduction
161
Table 6-1. Types of screws (continued)
Illustration Description
Retaining ring (e-type)
Uses
To hold a shaft through a slot.
For example: keep a gear on a shaft
162
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Supplies
The customer replaces print cartridges, the fuser, and the ETB as they are depleted.
Chapter 4 explains when to replace supplies and provides instructions about replacing them.
The printer tracks the amount of use on the customer-replaceable supplies by keeping a page count. Swapping supplies between printers might cause a misrepresentation of supply life values and is not recommended.
If you replace either the fuser or the transfer unit when servicing the printer, and these supplies have not yet reached the end of their estimated life, you must reset the page count for these supplies through the Configure device menu on the control panel. See
Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life and
Table 6-2. Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
Supply item
Black (K) print cartridge
Printer message Page counts
REPLACE
BLACK
CARTRIDGE
9,000 pages 2
Approximate replacement interval
1
2.7 months
Cyan (C) print cartridge
REPLACE CYAN
CARTRIDGE
8,000 pages 2
Magenta (M) print cartridge
REPLACE
MAGENTA
CARTRIDGE
Yellow (Y) print cartridge
REPLACE
YELLOW
CARTRIDGE
8,000 pages 2
8,000 pages 2
2.7 months
2.7 months
2.7 months
To install or order
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
ENWW Supplies
163
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Table 6-2. Approximate replacement intervals for supply items (continued)
Supply item Printer message Page counts Approximate replacement interval 1
To install or order
Image transfer kit
(ETB)
REPLACE
TRANSFER KIT
120,000 pages 3
40 months
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Image fuser kit
REPLACE
FUSER KIT
150,000 pages 3
50 months
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
1 Approximate life expectancies based on 3,000 pages per month.
2 The approximate average A4/Letter-size page count is based on 5% coverage of individual colors. Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
3 Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
The Hewlett-Packard Company recommends the use of HP products in this printer. Use of non-HP products can cause problems that require service that is not covered by the Hewlett-
Packard Company warranty or service agreements.
Print cartridges and ETB
It is recommended that you remove the print cartridges and ETB when servicing internal printer components. Place the print cartridges and ETB in a safe place while they are out of the printer. To avoid damaging the print cartridges, do not expose them to direct bright light.
Grasp the print cartridges by the blue handles to avoid accidentally touching the photosensitive drum inside each cartridge.
Do not place any items on the ETB. If the belt is punctured or otherwise damaged, print quality problems will result. Avoid touching the belt surface. Skin oils can cause print quality problems.
For instructions about removing the print cartridges, see chapter 4.
For instructions about removing the ETB, see chapter 4.
164
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Covers and external components
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of covers and external components.
Rear cover
1. Remove two screws (callout 1).
2. Pull out on the left side of the rear cover, and slide it to the left to remove it (callout 2).
Figure 6-2.
Remove the rear cover
ENWW Covers and external components
165
WARNING!
Top cover
The fuser might be hot. Wait 10 minutes for it to cool down before removing it.
1. Lift the top cover and remove the fuser. See Replacing the fuser for instructions about
removing the fuser.
2. Using your fingers or needle-nose pliers, pinch and release the white plastic clips
(callout 1) on the damper arm on the left side of the cover. It is easier to pinch these clips if you tip the top cover forward slightly.
3. Disengage the tab (callout 2) and remove the retaining block.
Push the cover to the left to release the hinge pin on the right side, and then pull the cover to the right to release the hinge pin on the left side.
Figure 6-3.
Remove the top cover (1 of 2)
Figure 6-4.
Remove the top cover (2 of 2)
166
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Rear top cover
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver between the rear top and side covers on the the right side of the printer.
5. Repeat steps three and four for the left side tabs (callout 2 in
Figure 6-5.
Remove the rear top cover (1 of 3)
ENWW Covers and external components
167
Figure 6-6.
Remove the rear top cover (2 of 3)
Figure 6-7.
Remove the rear top cover (3 of 3)
168
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Left cover
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) and disengage the locking tabs (callout 2).
4. Tilt the top of the cover away from the printer and remove it.
Figure 6-8.
Remove the left cover (1 of 2)
Figure 6-9.
Remove the left cover (2 of 2)
ENWW Covers and external components
169
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the left cover, be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes in the printer chassis.
Right cover
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove one screw (callout 1) and disengage the two locking tabs (callout 2).
4. Tilt the top of the right cover away from the printer and remove it.
Figure 6-10.
Remove the right cover
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the right cover, be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes in the printer frame.
170
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Multipurpose tray (tray 1)
1. Remove tray 2 from the printer and set it aside.
2. Unhook the two link arms (callout 1).
3. Flex the tray inward near the two link arms, and remove the tray.
Figure 6-11.
Remove the multipurpose tray
ENWW Covers and external components
171
CAUTION
Front cover
1. Remove the multipurpose tray. See
2. Unhook the two spring rods (callout 1) from the slots (callout 2) on both sides of the printer.
Spring tension holds the rods in place. Use caution when removing them. Tilt the tray up slightly to lessen the spring tension, which makes the rods easier to remove.
3. Press outward on the tray near the tray hinge pins and remove the cover.
Figure 6-12.
Remove the front cover
Reinstallation tip
Make sure that the rods are engaged in the slots in the printer frame (callout 2) when reinstalling the front cover.
172
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Control panel
1. Open the top cover if you have not already removed it.
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
3. Lift the right side of the control panel, disconnect one connector (callout 2), unwind the wires from the stay (callout 3), and remove the control panel.
Figure 6-13.
Remove the control panel (1 of 3)
Figure 6-14.
Remove the control panel (2 of 3)
ENWW Covers and external components
173
Figure 6-15.
Remove the control panel (3 of 3)
Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Some printer models are shipped without the control panel overlay installed or you might prefer using a different overlay from the one that is installed. Overlays are available for several languages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1. Opent the top cover. Use a small flat-blade screw driver to release the locking tabs on either side of the control-panel overlay, and then remove the overlay.
2. Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel. Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face. Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel. Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the blue button.
174
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
3. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
4. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
5. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
7. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
8. Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
9. Press to select LANGUAGE.
10. Press to highlight the desired language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed. Labels are available for several languages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1. Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label.
2. Position the new label over the top of the control panel.
3. Press the label firmly down onto the control panel.
Note
When applying the label, start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel.
ENWW Covers and external components
175
4. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
5. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
7. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
8. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
9. Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
10. Press to select LANGUAGE.
11. Press to highlight the desired language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
176
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Internal components
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components
DC controller shield
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
Print cartridges and ETB. See Replacing supply items .
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
2. Remove nine screws (callout 1). A tenth screw might be located on the rear of the printer at the bottom of the DC controller shield (callout 2). If that tenth screw is present, remove it.
3. Remove the DC controller shield.
Figure 6-16.
Removing and replacing the DC controller shield
Internal components (front)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the front of the printer.
ENWW Internal components
177
Paper pickup unit
1. Remove the DC controller shield. See
.
2. Use a screwdriver to rotate the ETB latch receptacles up. They are stiff and might be difficult to move.
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
4. Disconnect the connector (J1020 on the DC controller; callout 2) and push the connector through the hole in the chassis (callout 3).
5. Lift the paper pickup unit up and pull it forward to remove it.
Figure 6-17.
Remove the paper pickup unit (1 of 2)
Figure 6-18.
Remove the paper pickup unit (2 of 2)
178
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Paper pickup sensor PCA
1. Remove the paper pickup unit. See Paper pickup unit .
2. Push in on the black tab (callout 1) on the right side of the paper pickup unit and then remove the sensor cover.
3. Remove three screws (callout 2), disconnect the connector (callout 3), and then remove the sensor PCA..
Figure 6-19.
Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA (1 of 2)
Figure 6-20.
Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA (2 of 2)
ENWW Internal components
179
Cassette (tray 2) paper pickup rollers
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
Print cartridges and ETB. See Replacing supply items .
●
Paper pickup unit. See Paper pickup unit .
2. From the bottom of the paper pickup unit, firmly push down on the paper pickup rollers
(callout 1) to remove them.
Figure 6-21.
Remove the cassette (tray 2) pickup rollers
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the paper pickup rollers, be sure to fit the pins on the pickup roller into the holes on the pickup roller shaft.
Figure 6-22.
Replace the cassette (tray 2) pickup rollers
180
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Paper pickup drive unit
1. Remove the paper pickup unit. See Paper pickup unit .
2. On the bottom of the paper pickup unit, remove the screw holding the gear cover in place, and then remove the gear cover.
3. Unhook the spring from the gear (callout 1).
4. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on the tab in the center of the gear (callout 2) to release it, and then remove the gear.
5. Remove three black screws (callout 3).
6. Disconnect the three connectors on the back of the paper pickup drive unit, and then remove the unit.
Figure 6-23.
Note
Remove the paper pickup drive unit
Multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad
1. Remove tray 2 from the printer, and remove any paper in the tray.
2. Rotate the two lock pins outward (callout 1), and tilt the cassette cover forward to remove it.
3. Push the blue roller (callout 2) towards the back of the tray, and remove it.
The locking pins are not captive. Do not loose them when the tray cover is removed.
4. Pull up on the multipurpose tray pickup roller (callout 3), and remove it.
5. Push outward on the two tabs that hold the separation pad in place (callout 4).
6. Pull the separation pad forward to remove it (callout 5).
ENWW Internal components
181
Note
Always replace the separation pad when you replace the multipurpose tray pickup roller.
Figure 6-24.
Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad (1 of 2)
Figure 6-25.
Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad (2 of 2)
182
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Solenoids
1. Remove the paper pickup unit. See Paper pickup unit .
2. To remove the multipurpose tray solenoid, remove one screw (callout 1) and disconnect the connector (callout 2).
3. To remove the cassette solenoid, remove one screw (callout 3) and disconnect one connector (callout 4).
Figure 6-26.
Note
Remove the solenoids
Color registration detection unit
1. Open the top cover and the front cover.
2. Remove the ETB.
To protect the ETB from damage, always remove the ETB when removing the color registration detection unit.
3. Remove the control panel. See
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
5. Remove two screws (callout 2).
6. Remove one screw (callout 3). This screw is located on the right side of the printer, underneath the plate where the screws in callout 2 are located.
7. Remove the control panel support assembly (callout 4), and then remove the color registration detection unit, which is located behind the stay.
ENWW Internal components
183
CAUTION
Do not touch the lens for the color registration detection unit.
Figure 6-27.
Remove the color registration detection unit (1 of 2)
Figure 6-28.
Remove the color registration detection unit (2 of 2)
Internal components (left side)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the left side of the printer.
184
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
3. Release two locking tabs (callout 2) and then remove the environment sensor.
Figure 6-29.
Remove the environment sensor
Drum drive units
Removing the drum drive units requires several distinct procedures.
Drum drive developing disengaging rod
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2. Remove the five screws (callout 1), and then remove the drum drive grounding plate
(callout 2) that covers the developing disengaging rod.
ENWW Internal components
185
3. Unhook the spring (callout 3), and then slide the developing disengaging rod up and out.
Figure 6-30.
Remove the developing disengaging rod
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the developing disengaging rod, be sure to rotate the white gear (located between the black and magenta drum drive units) clockwise until it comes to a complete stop
(callout 4).
You cannot rotate the white gear unless all of the print cartridges are removed.
Also make sure that the developing disengaging rod passes through the slots in the drive clutches (in the up position; callout 5) in each of the four drum drive units, engaging each clutch. The clutch on the yellow drum drive unit is particularly difficult to see and to engage.
Figure 6-31.
Reinstall the developing disengaging rod (1 of 2)
186
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Figure 6-32.
Note
Reinstall the developing disengaging rod (2 of 2)
Drum drive gears
1. Remove the developing disengaging rod. See Drum drive developing disengaging rod
.
2. Remove the eight screws shown in callout 1, and then remove the four drum gear grounding plates.
The grounding plates and drive gears for the cyan and magenta drum drive units have longer shafts than those in the yellow and black drum drive units.
ENWW Internal components
187
3. Remove the four drum drive gears (callout 2).
Figure 6-33.
Note
Remove the drum drive gears
Calibrate the printer after removing and replacing any of the drum drive gears. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Drum home-position sensors
1. Remove the drum drive gears. See
2. Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
3. Push each drum home-position sensor holder (behind the connectors shown in callout 1) toward the rear of the printer, and flex it to remove the projection. Remove the sensor.
188
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Disengage the two tabs that hold each drum home-position sensor in its holder, and then remove the sensors.
Figure 6-34.
Note
Remove the drum home-position sensors
Calibrate the printer after reassembling the drum drive position sensors. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Drum drive motors
1. Remove the drum drive gears. See
2. From the front of the printer, release the tab that holds the black interlock cover (callout
1) in place, and then remove the interlock cover.
ENWW Internal components
189
3. Remove the interlock arm from the interlock lever (callout 2).
Figure 6-35.
Remove the interlock cover
Figure 6-36.
Remove the interlock arm
4. Lift the cartridge shutter bar (callout 3) up and out of the printer.
5. Remove four screws (callout 4). In the picture, the gear hides the screw in the upper-left corner.
6. Disconnect the connector for each drum drive motor from the DC controller PCA.
190
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
7. Remove the drum drive motors.
Figure 6-37.
Note
Remove the drum drive motors (cyan motor is shown)
Calibrate the printer after reassembling the drum drive motors. See
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
.
Memory-tag antenna PCAs
1. Remove the drum drive units. See
2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and remove the grounding plate (callout 2).
3. Remove the white retainer (callout 3).
4. Disconnect the connector (callout 4) from the memory controller PCA.
5. Remove the memory-tag antenna PCA, which is inside the slot.
Figure 6-38.
Remove the memory-tag antenna PCA (cyan is shown)
ENWW Internal components
191
Developing disengaging motor assembly
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Developing disengaging rod. See
Drum drive developing disengaging rod .
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
4. Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly.
Figure 6-39.
Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly
192
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
CAUTION
DC controller PCA
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2. Remove four screws (callout 1).
3. Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller PCA, including the formatter ribbon cable (callout 2).
When removing the formatter ribbon cable, be careful not to tear it or to damage the connector. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection. Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab.
4. Remove the DC controller PCA.
Figure 6-40.
Note
Remove the DC controller PCA
Calibrate the printer after reinstalling the DC controller PCA. See
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
.
ENWW Internal components
193
Memory controller PCA
1. Remove the DC controller PCA. See
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
3. Disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
4. Remove the memory controller PCA.
Figure 6-41.
Remove the memory controller PCA
194
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Cassette paper-size-detection switch
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
3. Squeeze the two locking tabs (callout 2), and remove the cassette paper-size-detection switch.
Figure 6-42.
Remove the cassette paper-size-detection switch
Internal components (rear)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the rear of the printer.
ENWW Internal components
195
Note
Formatter
1. Remove eight screws (callout 1).
4650 model has different connectors, but the eight screws are in the same location.
2. Grasp the black disk-drive lock (callout 2), and pull the formatter out of the printer.
Figure 6-43.
Note
Remove the formatter (HP Color LaserJet 4600 model is shown)
Calibrate the printer after reinstalling the formatter. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
196
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
CAUTION
Low-voltage power supply
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
2. Remove five screws (callout 1; check all three photographs for screw locations).
3. Disconnect the connecting rod (callout 2).
4. Disconnect the three connectors (callout 3).
5. Remove the low-voltage power supply.
When removing the low-voltage power supply, be sure that elements do not touch sheet metal.
Figure 6-44.
Remove the low-voltage power supply
ENWW Internal components
197
Figure 6-45.
Remove the low-voltage power on the rear
Figure 6-46.
Remove the low-voltage power supply on the left side
198
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Power-supply fan (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
● Low-voltage power supply. See
.
2. Disconnect on connector from the DC controller PCA (callout 1).
3. Remove the wire from the wire guide, and pass the wire through the hole in the chassis
(callout 2).
4. Release the locking tabs on the fan and remove the power supply fan (callout 3).
Figure 6-47.
Remove the power-supply fan (1 of 2; HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
ENWW Internal components
199
Figure 6-48.
Remove the power-supply fan (2 of 2; HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
200
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
CAUTION
Formatter case
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
2. At the rear of the printer, remove eight screws (callout 1).
3. On the DC controller PCA, release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable, and disconnect the cable (callout 2).
When removing the formatter ribbon cable, be careful not to tear it. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection. Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab.
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and remove the formatter case.
Figure 6-49.
Remove the formatter case (1 of 2)
ENWW Internal components
201
Figure 6-50.
CAUTION
Remove the formatter case (2 of 2)
Laser/scanner components
Removing the laser/scanner assembly requires several distinct procedures.
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
2. On the DC controller PCA, disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
3. On the DC controller PCA, release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable, and disconnect the cable (callout 2).
When removing the formatter ribbon cable, be careful not to tear it. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection. Do not pull the ribbon cable without releasing this tab.
202
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
4. Remove the formatter case. See
Figure 6-51.
CAUTION
Disconnect the laser/scanner connectors and formatter ribbon cable
5. At the rear of the printer, place the cardboard spacer (included with the laser/scanner assembly) underneath the V mark on the bottom of the printer frame (callout 3).
Always place the spacer under the printer frame. This spacer supports the printer and keeps it from flexing when the plate that covers the laser/scanner units is removed. If the printer frame flexes, the laser beams can become skewed, resulting in print-quality problems.
6. Remove four screws (callout 4).
7. Using needle-nose pliers, pull down on the right side of the wire clip, then release the left side of the clip from the bracket. Repeat this step for each of the four clips.
8. Remove the plate that covers the laser/scanner units.
Figure 6-52.
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate (1 of 2)
ENWW Internal components
203
Figure 6-53.
Hint
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate (2 of 2)
When reinserting the four wire clips, insert the left end of the clip first, thread the clip under the center notch, and then insert the right end of the clip.
Remove the laser/scanner retaining bars
1. Remove the laser/scanner cover plate. See
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate
.
2. Pull the cables for the four laser/scanner connectors free of the printer chassis.
3. On the left side of the printer, remove one screw above the DC controller (callout 1).
4. Push the top of the sheet-metal scanner retaining bar towards the laser/scanner units
(callout 2).
204
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
CAUTION
5. Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer.
The scanner retaining bars are under spring tension. Remove them carefully.
Figure 6-54.
Remove the left side laser/scanner retaining bar (1 of 2, left side of printer)
Figure 6-55.
Remove the left side laser/scanner retaining bar (2 of 2, rear of printer)
6. On the top surface of the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 3).
7. On the right side of the printer, push the top of the sheet-metal scanner retaining bar in towards the laser/scanners (callout 4).
ENWW Internal components
205
8. Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer.
Figure 6-56.
Remove the right side laser/scanner retaining bar (1 of 2, right side of printer)
Figure 6-57.
Remove the right side laser/scanner retaining bar (2 of 2, rear of printer)
Reinstallation tip
Reinstall the laser/scanner retaining bars in the same order that you removed them: the left side and then the right side. Feed the connector cables through the frame and reconnect the connectors to the DC controller.
To remove the laser/scanner assemblies
1. Remove the laser/scanner retaining bars. See
Remove the laser/scanner retaining bars .
2. Slide the cyan laser/scanner unit to the left and then pull it out of the printer.
3. For the yellow, magenta, and black laser/scanner units, first unhook each assembly from the white strap (callout 1). Then pull the laser/scanner units out of the printer.
206
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
CAUTION
CAUTION
When reinstalling the laser/scanner units, always reconnect them to the strap (callout 1).
Failure to do so could cause the laser/scanners to become distorted, and the laser beam could become skewed, resulting in image defects.
The laser/scanner unit is not adjustable in the field. Do not disassemble it.
Figure 6-58.
Remove the laser/scanner assemblies
Internal components (right side)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the right side of the printer.
ENWW Internal components
207
WARNING!
High-voltage power supply PCA
The high-voltage power supply PCA is an electrostatic-sensitive device.
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
3. Pinch the four retainer clips (callout 2) to release the board.
4. Disconnect the connector (callout 3).
5. Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA.
Figure 6-59.
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA
208
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the high-voltage power supply PCA, be sure to align the white markings on the left side of the PCA with the hooks on the printer, and then snap in the PCA. Verify that the PCA is aligned correctly by looking through the 12 holes on the PCA (callout 5). When the PCA is aligned correctly, you can see part of the contact springs (callout 6) when you look through the holes.
Figure 6-60.
Align the high-voltage power supply PCA
ENWW Internal components
209
WARNING!
Toner level detection PCA
The toner-level detection PCA is an electrostatic-sensitive device.
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
●
High-voltage power supply PCA. See High-voltage power supply PCA .
2. Remove three screws (callout 1).
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 2).
4. Remove the toner-level detection PCA (callout 3).
Figure 6-61.
Remove the toner level detection PCA
210
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
High-voltage contact blocks
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
●
High-voltage power supply PCA. See High-voltage power supply PCA .
● Toner-level detection PCA. See
.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1).
3. Remove wires from the guides (callout 2).
4. Remove the high-voltage contact block (callout 3).
5. Repeat for each of the four high-voltage contact blocks.
Figure 6-62.
Remove the high-voltage contact blocks (cyan is shown)
ENWW Internal components
211
Door switch
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
2. Remove one screw (callout 1).
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
4. Remove the door switch.
Figure 6-63.
Remove the door switch
Internal components (top)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the top of the printer.
212
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
WARNING!
Fuser power supply PCA
The fuser power supply PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device.
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
2. Disconnect the J203 connector (callout 1).
3. Remove the cable (callout 2) from the fuser power supply cover.
4. Remove one screw (callout 3), and then remove the fuser power supply cover (callout 4).
5. Remove two screws (callout 5), and then use needle-nose pliers remove four clips
(callout 6).
6. Disconnect four connectors (callout 7), and then remove the fuser power supply PCA.
Figure 6-64.
Remove the fuser power supply PCA (1 of 2)
ENWW Internal components
213
Figure 6-65.
Remove the fuser power supply PCA (2 of 2)
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the fuser power supply PCA, connect the J203 connector last.
214
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser drive unit
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
● Control panel. See
.
2. From the left side of the printer, at the top and front of the printer frame, unhook the white tab that holds the hinge cover in place, and remove the hinge cover. (This tab is located above and to the right of the black-drum drive unit.)
3. On the DC controller, disconnect the three connectors J1002, J1030, and J1034.
4. Remove three screws (callout 1 in Figure 6-66. Remove the fuser drive unit (1 of 2) and
Figure 6-67. Remove the fuser drive unit (2 of 2)
).
5. Disconnect the connector (callout 2). (This connector is hidden in
6. Remove the fuser drive unit from the printer.
7. Remove the screw that attaches the hinge unit, and remove the hinge unit from the fuser drive.
Figure 6-66.
Remove the fuser drive unit (1 of 2)
ENWW Internal components
215
Figure 6-67.
Remove the fuser drive unit (2 of 2)
216
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Fuser inlet paper sensor
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Fuser. See
2. Unhook two tabs (callout 1; they are on the front of the sensor).
3. Disconnect the connector directly in front of those tabs. (This connector is hidden in the photo).
4. Remove the fuser paper sensor.
Figure 6-68.
Remove the fuser paper sensor
ENWW Internal components
217
Fuser delivery sensor
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Fuser. See
2. Unhook the two tabs on the back of the sensor (on the connector side).
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
4. Remove the fuser delivery sensor (callout 2).
Figure 6-69.
Remove the fuser delivery sensor
218
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Output bin full sensor
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Fuser. See
2. Unhook the two tabs (callout 1).
3. Disconnect one connector (callout 2).
4. Remove the output bin full sensor (callout 3).
Figure 6-70.
Remove the output bin full sensor
ENWW Internal components
219
Note
Cartridge fan
The cartridge fan is the vertical fan that is closest to the front of the printer.
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2. Disconnect the connector J1004 on the DC controller PCA.
3. Remove the cables from the guides (callout 1).
4. Remove the two screws (callout 2).
5. Remove the fan holder and fan from the printer (callout 3).
6. Remove the fan from the fan holder.
Figure 6-71.
Remove the cartridge fan
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the cartridge fan, be sure that the arrow on the fan holder and the arrow on the fan are pointing in the same direction.
220
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Note
Formatter fan
The formatter fan is the horizontal fan that is closest to the rear of the printer.
1. Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Cartridge fan and holder. See
2. Disconnect the connector J1003 on the DC controller.
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
4. Remove the fan holder and fan from the fan printer.
5. Remove the fan from the fan holder.
Figure 6-72.
Remove the formatter fan
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the formatter fan, be sure that the arrow on the fan holder and the arrow on the fan are pointing in the same direction.
ENWW Internal components
221
Optional 500-sheet paper feeder
Use the following procedures to remove and replace components on the 500-sheet paper feeder.
Note
500-sheet paper feeder top cover plate
1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover from the 500-sheet paper feeder.
2. Remove the six screws (callout 2), and then remove the top plate.
The internal components of the 500-sheet paper feeder are mounted on the underside of the top plate.
Figure 6-73.
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder top plate
222
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
500-sheet paper feeder drive unit
1. Remove the top plate from the 500-sheet paper feeder (see
500-sheet paper feeder top cover plate ), and turn it upside-down.
2. Remove the spring and the E-ring (callout 1).
3. Unhook the tab in the center of the gear (callout 2), and remove the gear.
4. Disconnect three connectors (callout 3; two of the connectors are on the paper feeder
PCA).
5. Remove two screws (callout 4), and then slide the drive unit out.
Figure 6-74.
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder drive unit (1 of 2, top view)
Figure 6-75.
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder drive unit (2 of 2, side view)
ENWW Optional 500-sheet paper feeder
223
Reinstallation tip
When reassembling the drive unit, the cam shown in callout 5 and the gear shown in callout
6, should be in the positioned as in
Figure 6-76. Align the 500-sheet paper feeder cam and gear .
Figure 6-76.
Align the 500-sheet paper feeder cam and gear
500-sheet paper-feeder pickup rollers
The procedure for removing the 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers is essentially the
same as for the cassette (tray 2) pickup rollers. See Cassette (tray 2) paper pickup rollers
.
224
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
WARNING!
500-sheet paper-feeder PCA
The paper-feeder PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device.
1. Remove the top plate from the 500-sheet paper feeder (see
500-sheet paper feeder top cover plate ), and then turn it upside-down.
2. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1).
3. Remove the screw (callout 2).
4. Remove the paper-feeder PCA.
Figure 6-77.
Remove the 500-sheet paper-feeder PCA
ENWW Optional 500-sheet paper feeder
225
Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
Use the following procedures to remove and replace components on the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder.
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
1. Remove the tray 3 and tray 4 cassettes.
2. Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the front cover.
Figure 6-78.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
226
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the printer anchor plates (callout 2).
2. Remove six screws (callout 3) and remove the rear cover.
Figure 6-79.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover (1 of 2)
Figure 6-80.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover (2 of 2)
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
227
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover
1. Remove the following assemblies:
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
.
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover .
2. Remove four screws (callout 1) and remove the left cover.
Figure 6-81.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover
228
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover
1. Remover the following assemblies:
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
.
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover .
2. Remove four screws (callout 1) and then remove the right cover.
Figure 6-82.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
229
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly
1. Remove the following assemblies:
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover
.
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover
.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and release the wire harness from the harness guides (callout 2).
3. Remove ten screws (callout 3) and remove the upper-cassette pickup assembly (callout
4).
Figure 6-83.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly (1 of 2)
Figure 6-84.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly (2 of 2)
230
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly
1. Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2. Disconnect two springs (callout 1).
3. Remove two gears (callout 2) by releasing the locking tabs and sliding the gears off of the shaft.
4. Disconnect five connectors (callout 3) and then remove three screws (callout 4).
5. Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (callout 5).
Figure 6-85.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (1 of 2)
Figure 6-86.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (2 of 2)
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
231
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor
1. Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly. See
2 x 500sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly .
2. Remove two screws (callout 1).
3. Release the two feed roller retaining tabs (callout 2) and then remove the feed roller assembly (callout 3).
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 4) and then remove the feed sensor (callout 5).
Figure 6-87.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor (1 of 2)
Figure 6-88.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor (2 of 2)
232
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper sensor
1. Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2. Disconnect two springs (callout 1) and then remove two e-rings (callout 2).
3. Disconnect five connectors (callout 3) and then remove four screws (callout 4).
4. Remove the sheet metal cover (callout 5).
5. For the upper-cassette paper sensor, disconnect one connector (callout 6) and then remove the upper-cassette paper sensor (callout 7).
6. For the lower-cassette paper sensor, disconnect one connector (callout 8) and then remove the lower-cassette paper sensor (callout 9).
Figure 6-89.
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper sensor (1 of 3)
Figure 6-90.
ENWW
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper sensor (2 of 3)
Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
233
Figure 6-91.
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper sensor (3 of 3)
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper detection switch
1. Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2. For the upper cassette detection switch, disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the switch retaining tabs (callout 2) and then remove the upper-cassette paper switch
(callout 3).
3. For the lower cassette switch, disconnect one connector (callout 4), release the switch retaining tabs (callout 5) and then remove the lower-cassette paper sensor (callout 6).
Figure 6-92.
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper detection switch
234
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder driver PCA
1. Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2. Disconnect nine connectors (callout 1) and then remove two screws (callout 2).
3. Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder driver PCA (callout 3)
Figure 6-93.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder driver PCA
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
235
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers
1. Locate the upper and lower pickup rollers (callout 1).
2. For the upper pickup rollers: Separate the feeder from the printer. Push firmly on the roller to remove it from the roller shaft. Repeat this step for the remaining roller.
3. For the lower pickup roller: Remove the upper cassette from the feeder. Push firmly on the roller to remove it from the roller shaft. Repeat this step for the remaining roller.
Figure 6-94.
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the paper pickup rollers, be sure to fit the pins on the pickup roller into the holes on the pickup roller shaft.
236
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
7
Troubleshooting
This chapter contains information about the following topics.
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ................................246
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ................................262
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ....................................282
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ....................................300
Print-quality troubleshooting tools (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ...........................335
237
ENWW
Print the RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) ...................................381
Print the CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) .....................................382
238
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
239
Introduction
The information in this troubleshooting chapter is presented with the assumption that the reader has a basic understanding of the color laser-printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly, printer systems, and the basic theory of operation are provided in chapter 5. Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism.
This chapter contains the following sections:
● Troubleshooting process includes a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart. These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper operation or create print-quality problems. These tools also include recommendations for solving the cause of the error.
● Printer-error troubleshooting explains each control-panel-display message and suggests recommendations for clearing the cause of each message. When the printer message indicates a failure for which the root cause is not obvious, use the printer-error troubleshooting section and the troubleshooting tools section in this chapter to solve the problem.
● Paper-path troubleshooting provides techniques to solve feed problems. Explanations are provided about print media checks, troubleshooting jams, and the differences between jams caused by media and those caused by the printer.
● Image-formation troubleshooting suggests methods for solving print-quality problems.
● Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the printer hardware, printer configuration, network configuration, or software program.
● Control-panel troubleshooting provides procedures for printing a menu map from the printer control panel. It also describes the control-panel menus, the items within each menu, and the possible values for the menu items.
● Troubleshooting tools help isolate the cause of printer failures. This section includes explanations of the printer configuration page and the event log.
● Diagnostics provides instructions about how to gain access to and use the diagnostic tools that are incorporated into the printer.
● Service menu provides procedures for opening the service menu and performing service-oriented tasks. These tasks include counts for entering the serial number, service ID, transfer unit maintenance, fuser maintenance, color page, and total page, and clearing the event log.
● Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the printer's internal assemblies and sensors.
240
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Troubleshooting process
Note
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.
● Use the pre-troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions.
The flowchart guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following conditions:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem(s).
Table 7-1. Pre-troubleshooting checklist
Environment
Media
● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface?
● Is the printer to particle matter or dust?
● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?
● Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet?
● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters, as listed in chapter 1 of this manual?
● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials?
● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?
● Does the customer use only supported media?
● Is the media in good condition (contains no curls, folds, and so forth)?
● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?
ENWW Troubleshooting process
241
Table 7-1. Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)
Input trays ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?
● Is the media placed in the tray correctly?
● Are the paper guides aligned with the media?
● Is the cassette correctly installed in the printer?
Print cartridges
ETB and fuser
Covers
Condensation
Miscellaneous
● Is each print cartridge correctly installed?
● Are the ETB and fuser correctly installed?
● Are the top cover and front cover closed?
● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe the affected dry or leave the printer on for 10 to
20 minutes.
● Was a print cartridge installed soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the printer to sit at room temperature for one to two hours.
● Check for and remove any non-HP components (print cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the printer.
● If hardware or software configuration has not changed, or the problem is not associated with any specific software, contact the Customer Care Center (see chapter 1).
● Remove the printer from the network, and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting.
● For any print quality issues, calibrate the printer. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Troubleshooting basics
The procedure that follows highlights the general processes that you can use to isolate and solve printer hardware problems quickly.
Each step depicts a major troubleshooting step. A "yes" answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step.
242
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
ENWW
A "no" answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the referenced section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing this additional testing, proceed to the next major step in the troubleshooting flowchart.
1. Turn the power on. Does a readable message appear on the control-panel display? If yes, then go to step 2. If no, then check the following items.
If the printer control-panel display is blank, but the power-on checks pass, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the engine or display, or with the formatter.
□ Perform the troubleshooting power-on checks. See
Troubleshooting power-on in this
chapter.
□ When the control-panel display is fuctioning, go to step 2
2. Do any of the following messages appear on the control-panel display: READY,
OFFLINE, or POWERSAVER ON? if yes, go to step 3. If no, then check the following items.
□ Open the SHOW EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control-panel display to view informatiom about recent printer errors. See
View the event log on the control-panel display
in this chapter.
□ Does the LED blink at a constant rate? See
LED diagnostics in this chapter.
□ After correcting errors and performing the LED diagnostics, go to step 3.
3. Have you evaluated the event log? If yes, go to step 4. If no, then check the following items.
□ Open the PRINT EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control-panel display to show the last 50 printer errors. See
in this chapter. If
you experience jams while trying to print the event log, see Paper-path troubleshooting
in this chapter
□ Evaluate the event log. Look for reoccurring errors. After evualuating the event log, go to step 4.
4. Can you print a configuration page? See
Print the printer configuration page
in this chapter. If yes, go to step 5. If no, check the following items.
□ Open the SHOW EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control-panel
in this chapter. Correct the error.
□ After correcting the error, print a configuration page and verify the printer configuration information. See
Print the printer configuration page
in this chapter. Go to step 5.
5. Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, go to step 6. If no, check the following items.
□ Print the print-quality troubleshooting pages. See
Print-quality troubleshooting pages
in this chapter.
□ Solve the print-quality problems, and then go to step 6.
6. Can you successfully print from the computer that is directly connected to the printer or connected by a network? If yes, then this procedure is completed. If no, print a job from the computer that is directly connected to the printer or connected by a network. Perform the appropriate corrective actions.
Troubleshooting process
243
Troubleshooting power-on
When you turn on the printer, if it does not make any sound or if the control-panel display is blank, check the following items:
1. Verify that the printer is plugged into an active electrical outlet that is of the correct voltage.
2. Verify that the on/off switch is in the ON position.
3. Make sure that the rear fan is running, which indicates that the system is operational.
4. Verify that the firmware DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or compact flash (HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models) and the formatter are seated and operating correctly.
5. Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the printer on again.
6. Make sure that the control-panel display is connected.
7. Check the fuses in the power supply.
8. If necessary, replace the power supply.
9. If necessary, replace the DC controller.
244
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Printer-error troubleshooting
Note
The following tables explain messages that might appear on the printer control panel.
Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical printer messages table in this chapter, and numerical printer messages are listed in numerical printer messages table in this chapter.
Not all of the messages are described in the tables. Self-explanatory messages are not listed. Some messages might never appear, depending on the printer model that you have.
For example, messages that apply only to the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models will not appear on the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models.
Status messages
Status messages reflect the current state of the printer. They inform you of normal printer operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the printer changes. Whenever the printer is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready appears if the printer is online.
Warning messages
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with Ready or with status messages, and they appear until is pressed. If CLEARABLE
WARNING is set to JOB in the printer configuration menu, these messages are cleared by the next print job.
Note
Error messages
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding media or clearing a media jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable; if AUTO CONTINUE=ON the printer will continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message has appeared for 10 seconds.
Any button that is pressed during the 10-second appearance of an auto-continuable error message overrides the auto-continue feature, and the function of the pressed button takes precedence.
Critical error messages
Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on. These messages are not affected by the autocontinue setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting
245
Note
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the
ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select
CALIBRATE NOW to ensure good print quality after the repair. When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Message
Access denied menus locked
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY
CONNECTION
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
NOT AVAILABLE
For help press
alternates with
Description
An attempt has been made to modify a menu item, but the printer administrator has enabled the control-panel security mechanism. The message will disappear shortly, and the printer will return to the
Ready state.
The 500-sheet input tray is not making a sufficient connection with the printer.
Action
Contact the printer administrator to change settings.
The PJL encountered a request for a personality that does not exist in the printer. The job is aborted and no pages are printed.
1.
Verify that the printer is on a level surface.
2.
Turn the printer off.
3.
Reseat the printer on the
500-sheet input tray.
4.
If the printer is on the optional printer stand, make sure that the support straps are attached to the rear of the stand and the printer.
5.
Turn the printer on after reseating the 500-sheet input tray.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
NOT AVAILABLE
To continue press
Clearing paper path
The printer jammed or detected misplaced paper when turned on. The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically.
No action is necessary.
246
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
CLOSE FRONT COVERS
For help press
The covers have to be closed.
1.
Press for more information.
2.
Close the front covers.
Note
This message might also appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed. Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed.
CPR SENSOR
OUT OF RANGE
The CPR Sensor is not behaving correctly.
DATA RECEIVED
To print last page press
1.
Force a calibration by selecting Calibrate Now on the Print Quality menu. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
2.
If the message persists, verify that the cables are seated correctly and the connector J1024 is making good contact with the DC controller.
3.
Replace the colorregistration detection unit.
4.
If the message persists, replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Press to continue.
DETECTABLE SIZE
IN TRAY xx
For help press
The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed.
When the printer receives another file, the message should disappear.
A tray has been loaded with media that is a standard size and the switch in the tray is set to custom.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY xx
Recommend move switch to STANDARD
Printer-error troubleshooting
247
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
alternates with
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation
(for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1.
Printing can continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive.
2.
To clear the message, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message persists, remove and reinstall the
EIO disk drive.
4.
If the message persists, replace the EIO disk drive.
1.
Printing can continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
Ready
For menus press
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
Ready
For menus press
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
EIO DISK x
NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press
FLASH DEVICE
FAILURE
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
The EIO disk in slot x is not working correctly.
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
1.
Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the EIO disk drive and then try again.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
1.
To enable writing to the disk, turn off write protection, by using HP
Web Jetadmin.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Remove the EIO disk from the indicated slot and replace it with a new EIO disk drive.
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
1.
Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the flash DIMM.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message persists, remove and reinstall the flash DIMM.
4.
If the message persists, replace the flash DIMM.
248
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
FLASH FILE
OPERATION FAILED
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation
(for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1.
Printing can continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
Ready
For menus press
FLASH FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
Ready
For menus press
FLASH IS
WRITE PROTECTED
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1.
Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash memory and then try again.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
1.
To enable writing to the flash memory, turn off write protection by using
HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
INCORRECT <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
An incorrect cartridge is installed in a slot and the cover is closed.
1.
Press and then press for help.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
For status press
Incorrect PIN
The wrong PIN was typed.
INCORRECT SUPPLIES
For status press
Initializing
At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
Type the correct PIN. After three incorrect PIN entries, the printer returns to Ready.
1.
Press and then press for help.
2.
Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the incorrect supply.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
No action is necessary.
INSERT OR CLOSE
TRAY xx
For help press
This message appears when the printer is turned on, as soon as the individual tasks begin to initialize.
Tray xx must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
Printer-error troubleshooting
249
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
INSTALL <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
INSTALL FUSER
For help press
The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
1.
Insert the cartridge or make sure that the cartridge is fully seated.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
If the error persists, replace the cartridge.
5.
Verify that the connectors between the memory tag antenna, memory controller board, and the
DC controller are seated correctly.
6.
Replace the antenna PCA for the indicated color.
7.
Replace the memory controller PCA.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
1.
Insert the fuser or make sure that the installed fuser is fully seated.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
If the error persists, verify that fuser connector J4034 is good; replace the connector if necessary.
5.
Replace the fuser assembly.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
250
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
INSTALL SUPPLIES
For status press
INSTALL TRANSFER
UNIT
For help press
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
Insert the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated.
The transfer unit is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job.
1.
Press and then press for help.
2.
Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the missing or incorrect supply.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
1.
Insert the transfer unit or make sure the installed transfer unit is fully seated.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
If the error persists, verify that the ETB connectors
(J4017 on the ETB and
J1014 on the DC controller
PCA) are good. Replace the connectors as necessary.
5.
Replace the ETB.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. No other tray is available.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
Printer-error troubleshooting
251
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue press
If no paper in tray:
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
alternates with
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another
tray press
NON HP SUPPLY DETECTED
A new cartridge has been installed that is not made by
HP. This message appears until an HP cartridge is installed or Cancel Job is pressed.
If you believe that the cartridge is an HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud hotline.
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
To continue printing, press
Cancel Job . The first pending job will be cancelled.
NON HP CARTRIDGE
IN USE
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
The printer has detected that a non-HP print cartridge is currently installed.
If you believe that the cartridge is an HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud hotline.
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
252
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
ORDER <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
To continue press
ORDER <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES
LEFT
ORDER FUSER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES
LEFT
To continue press
The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP.
Override the setting by pressing .
The identified print cartridge is near end of its life.
The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages that appear.
The fuser is near its end of life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP.
1.
Order the identified print cartridge.
2.
Press to continue.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
Order the identified print cartridge.
2.
The estimate of pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage for this printer.
3.
Printing will continue until
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE appears.
4.
Press for detailed information.
5.
Press and to step through the instructions.
6.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
Order the image fuser kit.
2.
Press to continue printing. Printing can continue until the fuser reaches its end of life.
3.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
Printer-error troubleshooting
253
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
ORDER FUSER KIT
XXXX PAGES LEFT
To enter menus press
ORDER SUPPLIES
For menus press
ORDER SUPPLIES
For status press
The fuser is near its end of life.
The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages that appears.
More than one supply item is low.
More than one supply item is low and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenus is set to STOP.
1.
Order the image fuser kit.
2.
Printing can continue until the fuser reaches its end of life.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2.
Order the identified supplies.
3.
Printing can continue until supplies reach their end of life.
4.
Press for detailed information.
5.
Press and to step through the instructions.
6.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
2.
Order the identified supplies.
3.
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
Press twice to continue printing. Printing can continue until supplies reach their end of life.
4.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
254
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
XXXX PAGES LEFT
To continue press
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES
LEFT
To enter menus press
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Remove all paper from bin
Performing
PAPER PATH TEST
Performing upgrade
The number of pages that remain for the transfer unit has reached the low threshold and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP.
The transfer unit is near its end of life.
The output bin is full and must be emptied in order for printing to continue.
The printer is performing a
Paper Path test.
1.
Order the transfer kit.
2.
Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
Order an image transfer kit.
2.
Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
Remove media from the output bin.
No action is necessary; however, the data is useful to help troubleshoot jams.
No action is necessary.
Printing...
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
Printing...
REGISTRATION PAGE
Processing . . .
copy <X> of <Y>
A firmware upgrade is in process.
The printer is generating the print-quality troubleshooting pages. The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed.
The printer is generating the registration page. The printer will return to the SET
REGISTRATION menu when the page is printed.
The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
No action is necessary.
Printer-error troubleshooting
255
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Processing . . .
from tray XX
Processing duplex job
Do not grab paper until job completes
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
The printer is actively processing a job from the indicated tray.
Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job. Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete.
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
No action is necessary.
Do not grab paper when it comes into the output bin. The message disappears when the job is finished. You can then remove pages from the bin.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove this message from the control-panel display.
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
RAM DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
RAM DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
RAM DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
Ready
Diagnostics mode
To exit press Cancel Job button
Receiving upgrade
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation
(for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
1.
Printing can continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the controlpanel display.
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control-panel display.
This will also delete any files saved in RAM.
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
A firmware upgrade is in progress.
1.
To enable writing to the
RAM disk, turn off write protection by using HP
Web Jetadmin software.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to the Ready state.
256
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
REINSTALL <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
REMOVE ALL
PRINT CARTRIDGES
To exit press
Cancel Job key
REMOVE AT LEAST 1
PRINT CARTRIDGE
To exit press
Cancel Job key
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
The cartridge is not fully seated.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
The printer is executing a
Component test and the Belt only component is selected.
The printer is executing a
Disable cartridge check or
Component test and Cartridge
Motor component is selected.
Remove all of the print cartridges.
Remove one print cartridge.
alternates with
For help press
REPLACE FUSER KIT
The identified print cartridge has reached its end of life.
Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced.
1.
Replace the identified print cartridge to continue printing.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
The fuser kit is at its end of life.
1.
Replace the fuser to continue printing.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
Printer-error troubleshooting
257
Resend upgrade
Rotating. . .
alienation motor
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating. . .
belt drive
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating <color> cartridge motor
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating. . .
fuser motor
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
REPLACE SUPPLIES
For status press
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
At least one supply item is out and needs to be replaced and another supply item is either out or low.
The transfer unit has reached its end of life.
The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully.
1.
Press to identify which supplies should be replaced.
2.
Replace the identified supplies to continue printing.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
Replace the transfer unit to continue printing.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
Attempt the upgrade again.
The printer is testing the developing disengaging motor.
(This motor is called the
"alienation motor" in firmware messages.)
The printer is executing a
Component Test and the Belt
Only component is selected.
The printer is executing a
Component Test and the
<color> Cartridge motor
component is selected.
The printer is executing a
Component test and the Fuser
Motor component is selected.
Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test.
Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test.
Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test.
Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test.
258
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Rotating <color> Laser
Scanner
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating. . .
transfer motors
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
SIZE MISMATCH
TRAY xx= <SIZE>
For help press
A scanner test is in progress.
The printer is executing a
Component test and the
Transfer Motors component is selected.
The tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test.
Press Cancel Job when you want to stop this test.
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
TRAY xx CONTAINS
UNKNOWN MEDIA
TRAY xx EMPTY
<TYPE> <SIZE>
alternates with
The media type in the specified tray cannot be determined.
The specified tray is empty and needs to be filled, but the current job does not need this tray to print correctly.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the media.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
1.
To change the media type, press . Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2.
To change the media size to Letter, A4, Executive,
B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, leave the tray switch in the
STANDARD position.
3.
To change the media size to other sizes, move the tray switch to CUSTOM, adjust the guides against the media, and close the tray.
4.
Use and to highlight the media size, and then press to select.
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
Ready
For menus press
Printer-error troubleshooting
259
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
TRAY xx OPEN
For help press alternates with
Ready
For menus press
TRAY xx SIZE=
<XXXX SIZE>
For help press
The specified tray is open or is not closed completely.
An undetectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to
STANDARD.
Close the tray.
alternates with
TRAY xx SIZE=
<XXXX SIZE>
To change, move switch in tray xx
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size detected by tray
alternates with
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change type press
The size selected from the menu does not match the size that the tray detected. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray xx.
The tray switch is in the
STANDARD position.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the media.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
1.
To change the media type, press . Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2.
To change the media size to Letter, A4, Executive,
B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, leave the tray switch in the
STANDARD position.
3.
To change the media size to other sizes, move the tray switch to CUSTOM, adjust the guides against the media, and close the tray.
4.
Use and to highlight the media size, and then press to select.
260
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
ENWW
Table 7-2. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size specified by user alternates with
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change type
press
TYPE MISMATCH
TRAY xx= <TYPE>
alternates with
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray xx.
The tray switch is in the
CUSTOM position.
1.
To change the media type, press . Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2.
To change the media size to Letter, A4, Executive,
B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, set the tray switch to the
STANDARD position and adjust the guides to the correct positions.
3.
To change the media size to other sizes, leave the tray switch in the
CUSTOM position, adjust the guides against the media, and close the tray.
4.
Select the paper-handling menu from the control panel. Configure the size for the tray.
To change media type, press
. Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select a choice.
Ready
To enter menus
press
Unable to store job
<JOBNAME>
This warning appears after the printer has detected an overhead transparency in the paper path when the tray is configured for another type.
This results in a 41.5
Unexpected Type in Tray xx error. The user did not reconfigure the tray after the error message appeared, so the printer determines that the type of media is not what the tray is configured to hold.
A job cannot be stored because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem.
Install additional memory in the printer, or install a disk drive into the printer.
USE INSTEAD?
TRAY 2: <TYPE>
<SIZE>
TRAY 3: <TYPE>
Warming up
The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job.
If a disk drive is installed, delete any previously stored print jobs.
Highlight the media with and
. Press to select a choice.
The printer is coming out of powersave mode. Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed
Not all messages are described in the tables; those messages that are not listed are selfexplanatory.
Printer-error troubleshooting
261
Note
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the
ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW/FULL CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair. When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models) or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Message
Access denied
MENUS LOCKED
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY
CONNECTION
Description
An attempt has been made to modify a menu item, but the printer administrator has enabled the control-panel security mechanism. The message will disappear shortly, and the printer will return to the
READY or BUSY state.
The 500-sheet input tray is not making a sufficient connection with the printer.
Action
Contact the printer administrator to change settings.
Calibrating
Canceling
1.
Verify that the printer is on a level surface.
2.
Turn the printer off.
3.
Reseat the printer on the
500-sheet input tray.
4.
If the printer is on the optional printer stand, make sure that the support straps are attached to the rear of the stand and the printer.
5.
Turn the printer on after reseating the 500-sheet input tray.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Checking paper path
Checking printer
The printer is calibrating.
The printer is in the process of canceling a job. The message will continue to appear while the job is stopped, the paper path flushed, and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded.
The engine is turning its rollers to check for possible jams.
The engine is doing an internal test.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
262
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
NOT AVAILABLE
For help press alternates with
The PJL encountered a request for a personality that does not exist in the printer. The job is aborted and no pages will be printed.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY
NOT AVAILABLE
To continue press
Clearing event log
Clearing paper path
CLOSE FRONT COVERS
For help press
CPR SENSOR
OUT OF RANGE
This message appears while the event log is cleared. The printer will exit the menus after the event log has been cleared.
The printer jammed or detected misplaced media when it was turned on. The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically.
The covers have to be closed.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
The CPR Sensor is not behaving properly.
1.
Press for more information.
2.
Close the front covers.
Note
This message might also appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed. Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed.
1.
Force a calibration by selecting Full Calibrate
Now on the Print Quality menu. See
2.
If the message persists, verify the cables are seated correctly and the connector J1024 is making good contact with the DC controller.
3.
Replace the colorregistration detection unit.
4.
If the message persists, replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
Printer-error troubleshooting
263
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
DATA RECEIVED
To print last page press
Deleting. . . .
DETECTABLE SIZE
IN TRAY xx
For help press
The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed.
When the printer receives another file, the message should disappear.
The printer is currently deleting the stored job.
A tray has been loaded with media that is a standard size and the switch in the tray is set to custom.
Press to continue.
No action is necessary.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY xx
Recommend move switch to STANDARD
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
DISK DEVICE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
To clear press
Ready
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation
(for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1.
Printing can continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive.
2.
To clear the message, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message persists, remove and reinstall the
EIO disk drive.
4.
If the message persists, replace the EIO disk drive.
1.
Printing can continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
1.
Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the EIO disk drive and then try again.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
264
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
The EIO disk device in slot X is initializing.
1.
To enable writing to the disk, turn off write protection, by using HP
Web Jetadmin.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
No action is necessary.
EIO DISK X
Initializing
EIO DISK X
NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press
Event log empty
The EIO disk device in slot X is not working correctly.
Remove the EIO disk from the indicated slot and it replace with a new EIO disk drive.
No action is necessary.
FLASH DEVICE
FAILURE
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
SHOW EVENT LOG was selected on the control-panel, and the event log is empty.
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
The new flash DIMM that is installed in slot X is initializing.
1.
Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the
Flash DIMM.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message persists, remove and reinstall the flash DIMM.
4.
If the message persists, replace the flash DIMM.
No action is necessary.
Flash disk X initializing
Do not power off
FLASH FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation
(for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1.
Printing can continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
Ready
FLASH FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
1.
Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash memory and then try again.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Printer-error troubleshooting
265
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
FLASH IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
INCORRECT <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
An incorrect cartridge is installed in a slot and the cover is closed.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1.
To enable writing to the flash memory, turn off write protection, by using
HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
1.
2.
Press and then press for help.
Press and to step through the instructions.
Incorrect
INCORRECT SUPPLIES
For status press
Initializing
Initializing permanent storage
INSERT OR CLOSE
TRAY XX
For help press
The wrong PIN was typed.
At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
This message appears when the printer is turned on, as soon as the individual tasks begin to initialize.
This message appears when the printer is turned on to show that permanent storage is being initialized.
Tray XX must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed.
Type the correct PIN. After three incorrect PIN entries, the printer returns to Ready.
1.
Press and then press for help.
2.
Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the incorrect supply.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
266
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
INSTALL <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
INSTALL FUSER
For help press
The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
1.
Insert the cartridge or make sure that the cartridge is fully seated.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
If the error persists, replace the cartridge.
5.
Verify that the connectors between the memory tag antenna, memory controller board, and the
DC controller are seated correctly.
6.
Replace the antenna PCA for the indicated color.
7.
Replace the memory controller PCA.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
1.
Insert the fuser or make sure that the installed fuser is fully seated.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
If the error persists, verify that fuser connector J4034 is good. Replace that connector if necessary.
5.
Replace the fuser assembly.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
Printer-error troubleshooting
267
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
INSTALL SUPPLIES
For status press
At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
Insert the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1.
Press and then press for help.
2.
Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the missing or incorrect supply.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
INSTALL TRANSFER
UNIT
For help press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
The transfer unit is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job.
1.
Insert the transfer unit or make sure that the installed transfer unit is fully seated.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
If the error persists, verify that the ETB connectors
(J4017 on the ETB and
J1014 on the DC controller
PCA) are good. Replace connectors as necessary.
5.
Replace the ETB.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
268
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Move tray switch to custom
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Move tray switch to standard
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Move tray switch to custom
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job requires that the tray switch be in the custom position.
1.
Load the specified media into the tray.
2.
Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
3.
Verify that the tray switch is in the custom position.
4.
To use another tray, press
.
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job is a detectable size.
1.
2.
3.
Load the specified media into the tray.
Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
Verify that the tray switch is in the STANDARD position so that the printer will automatically detect the size.
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job requires that the tray switch be in the custom position.
1.
Load the specified media into the tray.
2.
Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
3.
Verify that the tray switch is in the custom position.
Printer-error troubleshooting
269
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Recommended move tray switch to standard
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job is a detectable size.
1.
Load the paper tray with the specified media.
2.
Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
3.
Verify that the tray switch is in the STANDARD position so that the printer will automatically detect the size.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
Loading program XX
Do not power off
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. No other tray is available.
Programs and fonts can be stored in the printer file system.
They are loaded into RAM when the printer is turned on.
The XX specifies a sequence number that indicates the program that is being loaded.
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
No action is necessary.
1.
Press for detailed information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue press
If no paper in tray:
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
270
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Moving solenoid
To exit press
Stop key
No job to cancel
The printer is executing a
Component Test and Solenoid is the component selected.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
NON HP CARTRIDGE
DETECTED
The Stop button was pressed, but no active job or buffered data is available to cancel. This message appears for approximately two seconds before the printer returns to the
Ready state.
A new cartridge has been installed that is not made by
HP. This message appears until an HP cartridge is installed or Stop is pressed.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge, please call the
HP fraud hotline.
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
To continue printing, press
Stop . The first pending job will be cancelled.
NON HP SUPPLY
IN USE
alternates with
Ready
ORDER <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
Ready
The printer has detected that a non-HP print cartridge is currently installed.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
The identified print cartridge is near its end of life.
If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge, please call the
HP fraud hotline.
CAUTION
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
1.
Order the identified print cartridge.
2.
The estimated pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage for this printer.
3.
Printing will continue until
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE appears.
4.
Press for detailed information.
5.
Press and to step through the instructions.
6.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
Printer-error troubleshooting
271
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
ORDER FUSER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES
alternates with
Ready
ORDER SUPPLIES
For menus press
alternates with
Ready
For help press
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES
LEFT
For help press alternates with
Ready
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Remove all paper from bin
Paused
To return to ready press STOP key
Performing
PAPER PATH TEST
The fuser is near its end of life.
The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages appears.
More than one supply item is low.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
The transfer unit is near its end of life.
The output bin is full and must be emptied in order for printing to continue.
The printer is paused, and no error messages are pending at the control-panel display. The I/
O continues receiving data until the memory is full.
The printer is performing a
Paper Path test.
1.
Order the image fuser kit.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2.
Order the identified supplies.
3.
Printing can continue until supplies reach its end of life.
4.
Press for detailed information.
5.
Press and to step through the instructions.
6.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
1.
Order an image transfer kit.
2.
Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
Remove media from the output bin.
Press Stop .
No action is necessary; however, the data is useful to help troubleshoot jams.
272
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Performing
PRINT/STOP TEST
Performing upgrade
The printer is performing a
Print/Stop test.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
please wait
Powersave on
Printing. . .
CMYK SAMPLES
Printing. . .
CONFIGURATION
Printing. . .
DEMO PAGE
Printing. . .
EVENT LOG
Printing. . .
FILE DIRECTORY
Printing. . .
FONT LIST
Printing. . .
MENU MAP
Printing...
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
Printing...
REGISTRATION PAGE
A firmware upgrade is in process.
The printer is clearing data.
The printer is in Powersave mode. Any button pressed or error condition, or the receipt of printable data, clears the message.
This message appears while the printer CMYK samples are generated.
The printer is generating a configuration page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a demo page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a event log page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a file directory page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a font list page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a menu map page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating the print quality troubleshooting pages. The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed.
The printer is generating the registration page. The printer will return to the SET
REGISTRATION menu when the page is completed.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Printer-error troubleshooting
273
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Printing...
RGB SAMPLES
Printing...
SUPPLIES STATUS
Printing...
USAGE PAGE
Processing duplex job
Do not grab paper until job completes
Processing. . .
Processing. . .
copy <X> of <Y>
Processing. . .
from tray XX
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
To clear press
This message appears while the printer RGB samples are generated.
The printer is generating a supplies status page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a usage page page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job. Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete.
The printer is currently processing a job but is not yet picking sheets. When paper motion begins, this message will be replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from.
The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed.
The printer is actively processing a job from the designated tray.
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Do not grab paper when it comes into the output bin. The message will disappear when the job is finished. You can then remove pages from the bin.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove this message from the display.
alternates with
Ready
RAM DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation
(for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1.
Printing can continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the controlpanel display.
3.
If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
274
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
RAM DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control-panel display.
This will also delete any files saved in RAM.
Ready
RAM DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
Ready
Diagnostics mode
To exit press Stop button
Receiving upgrade
REMOVE ALL
PRINT CARTRIDGES
To exit press Stop button
REMOVE AT LEAST ONE
PRINT CARTRIDGE
To exit press Stop button
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1.
To enable writing to the
RAM disk, turn off write protection by using HP
Web Jetadmin software.
2.
To remove this message from the display, turn the printer off and then on.
The printer is in a special diagnostics mode.
A firmware upgrade is in progress.
Press Stop to exit the special diagnostics mode.
OR
No action is necessary.
Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to the Ready state.
The printer is executing a
Component test and the component selected is Belt only.
Remove all of the print cartridges.
Remove one print cartridge.
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
The printer is executing a
Disable cartridge check or
Component test where the
Cartridge Motor is the component selected.
The identified print cartridge has reached its end of life.
Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1.
Replace the identified print cartridge to continue printing.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
Printer-error troubleshooting
275
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
REPLACE FUSER KIT
For help press
REPLACE SUPPLIES
For status press
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Printing black only
alternates with
Ready
For help press
The fuser kit is at its end of life.
1.
Replace the fuser to continue printing.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
At least one supply item is out and needs to be replaced and another supply item is either out or low.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1.
Press to identify which supplies should be replaced.
2.
Replace the identified supplies to continue printing.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
At least one color supply item is out and needs to be replaced. Printing can continue, but only black toner will be used.
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1.
Press to identify which supplies should be replaced.
2.
Replace the identified supplies to continue printing.
3.
Press for detailed information.
4.
Press and to step through the instructions.
5.
Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
276
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
Request accepted please wait
Resend upgrade
Resetting kit count
The transfer unit has reached end of life.
The printer has accepted a request to print an internal page, but the current job must finish printing before the internal page can print.
The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully.
1.
Replace the transfer unit to continue printing.
2.
Press for detailed information.
3.
Press and to step through the instructions.
4.
Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server.
No action is necessary.
Attempt the upgrade again.
Restoring factory settings
Restoring
Rotating motor
To exit press Stop button
Rotating. . .
belt drive
To exit press Stop button
Rotating <color> motor
To exit press Stop button
Rotating. . .
fuser motor
To exit press Stop button
Setting saved
YES is selected in the Reset
Supplies menu. Counts for any of the supplies that cannot be detected as new will be reset.
The printer is restoring factory settings.
The printer is restoring the last saved state.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
The printer is executing a
Component Test and Motor is the component selected.
Press Stop this test.
when ready to stop
The printer is executing a
Component Test and the Belt
Only is the component selected.
Press Stop when ready to stop this test.
A component test is in progress
The component selected is the
<color> Cartridge motor.
The printer is executing a
Component test and the Fuser
Motor is the component selected.
A menu selection has been saved
Press Stop when ready to stop this test.
Press Stop when ready to stop this test.
No action is necessary.
Printer-error troubleshooting
277
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
SIZE MISMATCH
TRAY XX=<SIZE>
For help press
alternates with
Ready
TRAY XX EMPTY
<TYPE> <SIZE>
alternates with
The tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
The specified tray is empty and needs to be filled, but the current job does not need this tray to print correctly.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
Ready
TRAY XX OPEN
For help press
The specified tray is open or is not closed completely.
Close the tray.
alternates with
Ready
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting saved
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to
STANDARD.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
278
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting not saved
To change size move guides in tray
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to
STANDARD.
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting not saved
To change move tray switch to CUSTOM
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting saved
To change move tray switch to STANDARD
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to
STANDARD.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to
STANDARD.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
Printer-error troubleshooting
279
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Verify tray switch set to
CUSTOM then close tray
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to
STANDARD.
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Recommend move switch in tray to STANDARD then close tray
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size detected by tray
alternates with
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change size or type press
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to
STANDARD.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray
XX. The tray switch is in the
STANDARD position.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
1.
Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2.
If the media used is Letter,
A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to
STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3.
Reset the paper size in the paper-handling menu.
1.
To change the media type, press . Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2.
To change the media size to Letter, A4, Executive,
B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, leave the tray switch in the
STANDARD position.
3.
To change the media size to other sizes, move the tray switch to CUSTOM, adjust the guides against the media, and close the tray.
4.
Use and to highlight the media size, and then press to select.
280
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size specified by user
alternates with
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change size or type press
TYPE MISMATCH
TRAY XX= <TYPE>
For help press
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray
XX. The tray switch is in the
CUSTOM position.
1.
To change media type, press . Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2.
To change the media size to Letter, A4, Executive,
B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, set the tray switch to the
STANDARD position and adjust the guides to the correct positions.
3.
To change the media size to other sizes, leave the tray switch in the
CUSTOM position, adjust the media guides against the media, and close the tray.
4.
Select the paper-handling menu from the control panel. Configure the size for the tray.
To change media type, press
. Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
alternates with
Ready
Unable to mopy job
<JOBNAME>
Unable to store job
<JOBNAME>
This warning appears after the printer has detected an overhead transparency in the paper path when the tray is configured for another type.
This results In a 41.5
Unexpected Type in Tray xx error. The user did not reconfigure the tray after the error message appeared, so the printer determines that the type of media is not what the tray is configured to hold.
A mopy job cannot be mopied because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem. Only one copy will be printed.
A job cannot be stored because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem.
No action is necessary.
Install additional memory in the printer, or install a disk drive into the printer.
USE TRAY XX
<TYPE><SIZE>
To change press /
To use press
The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job.
If a disk drive is installed, delete any previously stored print jobs.
Highlight the media with and
. Press to select a choice.
Printer-error troubleshooting
281
Note
Note
Table 7-3. Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
No action is necessary.
Wait for printer to reinitialize
RAM Disk settings have been changed before the printer automatically restarts, or external device modes have changed.
Warming up
The printer is coming out of powersave mode. Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed.
No action is necessary.
Not all messages are described in the tables; those messages that are not listed are selfexplanatory.
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the
ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select
CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair. When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
282
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Message
10.XX.YY SUPPLIES
ERROR
For help press
Note
The printer cannot always determine whether the error is in the cartridge or with the printer reader/writer.
13.XX.YY.DUPLEX
JOB INTERRUPTED
For help press
alternates with
13.XX.YY.DUPLEX
JOB INTERRUPTED
Discard top sheet and press
or
Description Action
The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or at least one memory tag is missing.
10.00.00 black print cartridge
10.00.01 cyan print cartridge
10.00.02 magenta print cartridge
10.00.03 yellow print cartridge
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Exchange the cartridge for the indicated color with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot. If the error follows the cartridge, replace that cartridge.
Otherwise, continue with step 3.
3.
Reseat the connectors between the memory PCA
(J602-J605) and the antenna PCAs (J901A-D), the memory PCA, and the
DC controller PCA (J1028).
4.
Replace the antenna PCA.
5.
Replace the memory PCA.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
A duplex job was interrupted by interference as media passed through the output bin during duplexing.
1.
Press for more information.
2.
Remove one or two pages from the output bin as directed by the message on the control-panel display.
3.
Press printing.
to continue
Note
If JAM RECOVERY = OFF, some pages will not be reprinted. Resend the missing pages.
13.XX.YY.DUPLEX
JOB INTERRUPTED
Discard top two sheets and press
Printer-error troubleshooting
283
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
DUPLEX PATH
For help press
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
PAPER INPUT PATH
For help press
A jam exists in the duplex path.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Determine whether the
ETB rollers or gears are worn or defective. Replace the ETB if they are.
4.
Check the duplex feed guide, which is part of the control-panel crossmember assembly. If the guide is worn or damaged, replace the crossmember assembly.
A jam exists in the media input path.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Check the registration shutter, and make sure that it is in place. Replace the paper pickup assembly if the shutter is damaged.
4.
Check the paper pickup feed rollers, and replace them if they are worn or damaged.
5.
Check the connectors, gears, solenoids, motors, and PCA on the paper pickup assembly. Replace the paper pickup assembly if necessary.
284
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.XX.YY JAM IN
PAPER PATH
For help press
There is a jam in the media path. 1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
If paper is folding into an accordion shape, check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the ETB and each cartridge is turning correctly. Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors.
4.
Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure that the spring is holding it in place.
5.
If the attaching roller gears are defective, replace the
ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB.
See
6.
Replace the paper pickup
PCA.
7.
Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper correctly.
Calibrate the printer.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Printer-error troubleshooting
285
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.XX.YY JAM IN TOP
COVER AREA
For help press
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 1
For help press
A jam exists in the top cover area.
A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot.
4.
Replace the fuser.
5.
Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place. If it is defective, replace it.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4.
Clean or replace the separation pad.
5.
Replace the tray 1 pickup solenoid.
6.
Replace the tray 1 pickup motor.
7.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
286
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
A page is jammed in tray 2.
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 2
For help press
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 3
For help press
A page is jammed in tray 3.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4.
Clean the feed roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
5.
Replace the tray 2 pickup solenoid.
6.
Replace the tray 2 pickup motor.
7.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4.
Clean the feed roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
5.
Replace the tray 3 pickup solenoid.
6.
Replace the tray 3 pickup motor.
7.
Replace the tray 3 paper feeder PCA.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Printer-error troubleshooting
287
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
For help press alternates with
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
To continue press
22 EIO X
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
press
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
For help press
The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in the available memory.
The printer EIO card in slot X has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state.
The printer parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
1.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
2.
Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error.
3.
Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
alternates with
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue press
40 EIO X BAD
TRANSMISSION
To continue
press
A connection with the card in
EIO slot X has been broken abnormally.
1.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
2.
Check that all cables are connected to the EIO ports and that the EIO board is seated properly.
3.
If possible, print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly.
288
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
41.3 UNEXPECTED
SIZE IN TRAY XX
For help press
alternates with
The media that is loaded is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
1.
If the incorrect size was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
41.5 UNEXPECTED
TYPE IN TRAY XX
For help press
alternates with
The printer senses a different media type in the media path than the type that is configured in the tray.
1.
If the incorrect type was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue press
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 unknown misprint error
2 beam detect misprint error
3 media feed error (size)
4 no VSYNC error
5 media feed error (type)
6 ETB detection error
7 feed delay error
9 noise VSREQ
1.
Press to continue or press for more information.
2.
If the message persists, turn the printer off and then on.
Printer-error troubleshooting
289
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
49.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to abort operation. This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands, corrupt data, or invalid operations. In some cases, electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the printer.
Other causes include poorquality parallel cables, poorconnections, or home-grown programs. On rare occasions, the formatter is at fault, which is usually indicated by a 79
Service Error.
1.
Press Cancel Job to clear the print job from the printer memory.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Try printing a job from a different software program.
If the job prints, go back to the first program and try printing a different file. If the message appears only with a certain software program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.
4.
If the message persists with different software programs and print jobs, disconnect all of the cables to the printer that connect it to the network or computer.
5.
Turn the printer off.
6.
Remove all memory
DIMMs or third-party
DIMMs from the printer.
(Do not remove the firmware DIMM in slot J1.)
7.
Remove all EIO devices from the printer.
8.
Turn the printer on.
9.
If the error no longer exists, install each DIMM and EIO device one at a time, making sure to turn the printer off and on again as you install each device.
10. Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error.
11. Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer.
12. If the error persists, replace the firmware DIMM.
13. Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer. See
.
290
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
50.X FUSER ERROR
For help press
A fuser error has occurred.
X Description
1 low fuser temperature
2 fuser warmup service
3 high fuser temperature
4 faulty fuser
5 inconsistent fuser
6 open fuser
1.
Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down.
2.
Reinstall the fuser, and check the connector J4034 that connects the fuser and the printer. Replace the connector if it is damaged.
3.
Turn the printer off and remove the fuser. Measure the resistance between the connector pins on the fuser. If resistance does not meet the following guidelines, replace the fuser.
● J4034-5 to J4034-6:
300 - 500 KOhms
● J4034-1 to J4034-2: less than 1 KOhm
4.
Check for continuity between connector pins
J4034-4 and J4034-2. If no continuity exists, replace the fuser.
5.
Replace the fuser power supply PCA.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Printer-error troubleshooting
291
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
A printer error has occurred.
51.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press alternates with
51.XY
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
53.X0.ZZ
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
X Description
1 beam detect error
2 laser error
Y Description
0 no color
K black
C cyan
M magenta
Y yellow
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 scanner error
2 scanner startup error
3 scanner rotation error
Y Description
0 no color
K black
C cyan
M magenta
Y yellow
An error has occurred in the on board RAM.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCA
(J1009 - J1012).
4.
Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
5.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCA
(J1009 - J1012).
4.
Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
5.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
292
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
53.XY.ZZ
PRINTER ERROR
To continue press
CANCEL JOB
53.10.05
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
An error occurred in some printer memory.
Press Cancel Job . If the problem persists, replace the
DIMM card in the slot indicated.
X DIMM Type
1 RAM
Y Device Location
1 DIMM Slot 1
2 DIMM Slot 2
3 DIMM Slot 3
4 DIMM Slot 4
ZZ Error Number
0 unsupported memory
1 unrecognized memory
2 unsupported memory size
3 failed RAM test
4 exceeded maximum RAM size
5 invalid DIMM speed
A DIMM is installed in both the
168-pin DIMM Slot 4 and the
100-pin DIMM Slot 5.
This is an invalid configuration.
DIMMs can not be installed in both of these slots at the same time.
Remove one of the DIMMs, or move one of the DIMMs to a different slot.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting
293
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
54.X PRINTER ERROR X Description
1 Low fuser temperature
3 Dmax density sensor
5 CPR sensor
6 OHT sensor
7 yellow drum phase (home) position sensor
8 magenta drum phase (home) position sensor
9 cyan drum phase (home) position sensor
10 black drum phase (home) position sensor
11 Yellow density sensor
12 Magenta density sensor
13 Cyan density sensor
14 Black density sensor
15 Yellow CPR sensor
16 Magenta CPR sensor
17 Cyan CPR sensor
18 Black CPR sensor
19 ETB speed control sensor
20 color plane registration sensor
21-24 toner level sensors
Turn the printer off and then on, and then check the following items in the order listed.
54.1 error: Check the fuser.
See 50.X fuser error.
54.3 error: Check the connections. Replace the color registration detection assembly.
54.5 error: Check the connections. Replace the color registration detection assembly.
54.6 error: Check the connections. Replace the paper pickup unit.
54.7, 54.8, 54.9, or 54.10
error: Check the connections.
Replace the drum-phase sensor for the indicated color.
54.11, 54.12, 54.13, or 54.14
error: Check the connections.
Check the cartridge and replace it if necessary. Replace the color-registration detection assembly.
54.15, 54.16, 54.17, 54.18:
Check the connections.
Replace the color-registration detection assembly.
54.19 error: Check the ETB connection. Replace the ETB.
Replace the DC controller.
Calibrate the printer. See
.
54.20 error: Check the connection. Replace the colorregistration detection assembly.
54.21, 54.22, 54.23, or 54.24
error: Check the connections.
Replace the toner-level sensing
PCA. Replace the DC controller. Calibrate the printer.
See
.
294
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
55.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press alternates with
55.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue press
The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter. The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Reseat or replace the connectors between the
DC controller and the formatter.
4.
If the problem persists, replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
5.
Replace the formatter.
Initialize NVRAM. See
.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting
295
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
57.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer-fan error has occurred.
X Description
3 cartridge fan (vertical fan, F2)
4 formatter fan (horizontal fan,
F1)
Turn the printer off and then on.
57.3 Cartridge fan error (F2)
1.
Reconnect the connector
J1004 on the DC controller
PCA.
2.
Immediately after starting the print operation, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the cartridge fan.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
57.4 Formatter fan error (F1)
1.
Reconnect the connector
J1003 on the DC controller
PCA.
2.
Immediately after turning the printer on, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the formatter fan.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
A memory tag error was detected.
X Description
3 CPU
4 power supply
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Replace the memory PCA.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
296
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press alternates with
59.X Y
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer motor error has occurred.
X Description
0 motor error
1 motor startup error
2 motor rotation error
3 fuser motor startup error
4 fuser motor rotation error
5 print cartridge motor startup error
6 print cartridge motor rotation error
9 ETB motor startup error
A ETB motor rotation error
B developing disengaging motor startup error
C developing disengaging motor rotation error
Y Description
0 no color
K black
C cyan
M magenta
Y yellow
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed. Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed.
ETB motor error
1.
Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector,
J4017.
2.
Reconnect the connectors
J4022 for the ETB motor,
J4017 between the ETB and the printer, and J4014 on the DC controller PCA.
3.
Replace the ETB motor.
4.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Fuser motor error
1.
Reconnect the connectors
J4030 for the fuser motor and J1002 on the DC controller PCA.
2.
Replace the fuser drive assembly.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Printer-error troubleshooting
297
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
59.X Y
continued
62 NO SYSTEM
To continue turn off then on
64 PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
64 PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
No system was found.
A scan buffer error occurred.
Print cartridge motor error
1.
Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the
DC controller PCA (J1013 for cyan, J1031 for magenta, J1032 for yellow, and J1033 for black).
2.
Replace the drum drive assembly for the indicated print cartridge.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Developing disengaging motor error
1.
Reconnect the connectors
J4024 and J1019 between the developing disengaging motor and the
DC controller PCA.
2.
Replace the developing disengaging drive assembly.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Reseat the firmware
DIMM, making sure that it is in the 168-pin slot J1.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Perform a cold reset.
3.
If the message persists, replace the formatter or firmware DIMM.
298
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE ERROR
For help press alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE ERROR
To continue
press
One or more printer settings that were saved in the nonvolatile storage device are invalid and have been reset to its factory default. Pressing should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Check the printer settings to determine which settings have been changed.
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
For help press
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A non-volatile storage device is full. Pressing should clear the message. Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
To continue
press
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE WRITE FAIL
To continue press
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A non-volatile storage device is failing to write. Pressing should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If a 68.0 error persists, perform an NVRAM intitialization.
4.
For 68.1 errors, use the
HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive.
5.
If a 68.1 errors persists, reinitialize the hard disk.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the problem persists, initialize NVRAM.
4.
Reinitialize the hard disk.
79.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A critical hardware error has occurred.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
If the problem persists, reseat the firmware DIMM.
3.
Reseat the formatter.
4.
Replace the firmware
DIMM.
5.
Replace the formatter.
Calibrate the printer. See
.
Printer-error troubleshooting
299
Note
Table 7-4. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
8X.YYYY
EIO ERROR
The EIO accessory card in slot
X has encountered a critical error.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
If the problem persists, reseat the EIO card.
3.
Replace the EIO card.
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the
ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW/FULL CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair. When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models) or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Message
10.XX.YY SUPPLYY
MEMORY ERROR
alternates with
For help press
Description Action
The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or at least one memory tag is missing.
10.00.00 black print cartridge
10.00.01 cyan print cartridge
10.00.02 magenta print cartridge
10.00.03 yellow print cartridge
1.
Turn the printer off and then back on.
2.
Press for more information
Note
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
300
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
10.10.YY SUPPLY
MEMORY ERROR
alternates with
For help press
10.30.YY
alternates with
For help press
13.0A JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
For help press
The printer cannot read or write to the print cartridge memory tag or the memory tag is missing.
10.10.00 black print cartridge
10.010.01 cyan print cartridge
10.10.02 magenta print cartridge
10.10.03 yellow print cartridge
1.
Turn the printer off and then back on.
2.
Exchange the cartridge for the indicated color with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot. If the error follows the cartridge, replace that cartridge.
Otherwise, continue with step 3.
3.
Reseat the connectors between the memory PCA
(J602-J605) and the antenna PCAs (J901A-D), the memory PCA, and the
DC controller PCA (J1028).
4.
Replace the antenna PCA.
5.
Replace the memory PCA.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
A non-HP print cartridge is installed.
10.30.00 black print cartridge
10.30.01 cyan print cartridge
10.30.02 magenta print cartridge
10.30.03 yellow print cartridge
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Remove all of the print cartridges and turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the error persists, replace the indicated cartridge.
A jam exists in the top cover.
1.
2.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
Press and to step through the instructions.
Printer-error troubleshooting
301
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.02.00 JAM IN
Tray X
For help press
A page is jammed in tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4.
Clean the feed roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
5.
Replace the tray X pickup solenoid.
6.
Replace the pickup motor.
7.
Replace the paper pickup assembly (for tray 2).
8.
Replace the tray X paper feeder PCA (for the 500sheet tray 3 or the 2 x 500sheet feeder).
9.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
302
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.05.00 JAM IN
PAPER PATH
For help press
A page has jammed in the media path.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
If paper is folding into an accordion shape, check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the ETB and each cartridge is turning correctly. Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors.
4.
Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure that the spring is holding it in place.
5.
If the attaching roller gears are defective, replace the
ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB.
See
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
6.
Replace the paper pickup
PCA.
7.
Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper correctly.
Calibrate the printer.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
Printer-error troubleshooting
303
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.09.00 JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
For help press
alternates with
13.09.00 JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
Then open and close top cover
13.12.00.JAM IN
DUPLEX PATH
For help press
A page has jammed as it entered the fuser.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place. If it is defective, replace it.
4.
Replace the fuser.
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot.
5.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
A jam exists in the duplex path.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Determine whether the
ETB rollers or gears are worn or defective. Replace the ETB if they are.
4.
Check the duplex feed guide, which is part of the control-panel crossmember assembly. If the guide is worn or damaged, replace the crossmember assembly.
304
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 1
For help press
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
For help press alternates with
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
To continue
press
A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray.
The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in the available memory.
1.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
3.
Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4.
Clean or replace the separation pad.
5.
Replace the tray 1 pickup solenoid.
6.
Replace the tray 1 pickup motor.
7.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
8.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
1.
Press to resume printing (see the note below).
2.
Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error.
3.
Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
22 EIO X
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
press
The printer EIO card in slot X has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
Printer-error troubleshooting
305
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
For help press alternates with
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue press
22 SERIAL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
press
40 BAD SERIAL
TRANSMISSION
To continue press
40 EIO X BAD
TRANSMISSION
To continue
press
The printer parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
The printer serial buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
A serial data error (parity, framing, or line overrun) has occurred while the printer was receiving data.
A connection with the card in
EIO slot X has been broken abnormally.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
Press to resume printing.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
1.
Press to resume printing (see note below).
2.
Check that all cables are connected to the EIO ports and that the EIO board is seated properly.
3.
If possible, print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly.
Note
A loss of data will occur.
41.3 UNEXPECTED
SIZE IN TRAY XX
For help press
alternates with
The media that is loaded is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
1.
If the incorrect size was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another tray press
306
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
41.5 UNEXPECTED
TYPE IN TRAY X
For help press
alternates with
The printer senses a different media type in the media path than the type that is configured in the tray.
1.
If the incorrect type was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2.
Press and to step through the instructions.
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another tray press
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
press
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 unknown misprint error
2 beam detect misprint error
3 media feed error (size) no VSYNC error
5 media feed error (type)
6 ETB detection error
7 feed delay error
9 noise VSREQ
1.
Press to continue or press for more information.
2.
If the message persists, turn the printer off and then on.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting
307
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
49.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to abort operation. This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands, corrupt data, or invalid operations. In some cases, electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the printer.
Other causes include poorquality parallel cables, poorconnections, or home-grown programs. On rare occasions, the formatter is at fault, which is usually indicated by a 79
Service Error.
1.
Press Cancel Job to clear the print job from the printer memory.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Try printing a job from a different software program.
If the job prints, go back to the first program and try printing a different file. If the message appears only with a certain software program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.
4.
If the message persists with different software programs and print jobs, disconnect all of the cables to the printer that connect it to the network or computer.
5.
Turn the printer off.
6.
Remove all memory
DIMMs or third-party
DIMMs from the printer.
7.
Remove all EIO devices from the printer.
8.
Turn the printer on.
9.
If the error no longer exists, install each DIMM and EIO device one at a time, making sure to turn the printer off and on again as you install each device.
10. Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error.
11. Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer.
12. If the error persists, replace the firmware DIMM.
13. Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer. See
308
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
50.X FUSER ERROR
For help press
A fuser error has occurred.
X Description
1 low fuser temperature o
2 fuser warmup service
3 high fuser temperature
4 faulty fuser
5 inconsistent fuser
6 open fuser
1.
Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down.
2.
Reinstall the fuser, and check the connector J4034 that connects the fuser and the printer. Replace the connector if it is damaged.
3.
Turn the printer off and remove the fuser. Measure the resistance between the connector pins on the fuser. If resistance does not meet the following guidelines, replace the fuser.
● J4034-5 to J4034-6:
300 - 500 KOhms
● J4034-1 to J4034-2: less than 1 KOhm
4.
Check for continuity between connector pins
J4034-4 and J4034-2. If no continuity exists, replace the fuser.
5.
Replace the fuser power supply PCA.
6.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
Printer-error troubleshooting
309
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
A printer error has occurred.
51.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
To continue turn off then on
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
X Description
1 beam detect error
2 laser error
Y Description
0 no color
K black
C cyan
M magenta
Y yellow
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 scanner error
2 scanner startup error
3 scanner rotation error
Y Description
0 no color
K black
C cyan
M magenta
Y yellow
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCA
(J1009 - J1012).
4.
Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
.
5.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCA
(J1009 - J1012).
4.
Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
.
5.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
310
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
53.XY.ZZ
RAM/ROM MEMORY
An error occurred in some printer memory.
Press Stop . If the problem persists, replace the DDR card in the slot indicated.
X DIMM Type
1 RAM
Y Device Location
1 DDR Slot 1
2 DDR Slot 2
ZZ Error Number
0 unsupported memory
1 unrecognized memory
2 unsupported memory size
3 failed RAM test
4 exceeded maximum RAM size
5 invalid DDR speed
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting
311
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
54.X PRINTER ERROR X Description
1 Low fuser temperature
3 Dmax density sensor
5 CPR sensor
6 OHT sensor
7 yellow drum phase (home) position sensor
8 magenta drum phase (home) position sensor
9 cyan drum phase (home) position sensor
10 black drum phase (home) position sensor
11 Yellow density sensor
12 Magenta density sensor
13 Cyan density sensor
14 Black density sensor
15 Yellow CPR sensor
16 Magenta CPR sensor
17 Cyan CPR sensor
18 Black CPR sensor
19 ETB speed control sensor
20 color plane registration sensor
21-24 toner level sensors
Turn the printer off and then on, and then check the following items in the order listed.
54.1 error: Check the fuser.
See 50.X fuser error.
54.3 error: Check the connections. Replace the color registration detection assembly.
54.5 error: Check the connections. Replace the color registration detection assembly.
54.6 error: Check the connections. Replace the paper pickup unit.
54.7, 54.8, 54.9, or 54.10
error: Check the connections.
Replace the drum-phase sensor for the indicated color.
54.11, 54.12, 54.13, or 54.14
error: Check the connections.
Check the cartridge and replace it if necessary. Replace the color-registration detection assembly.
54.15, 54.16, 54.17, 54.18:
Check the connections.
Replace the color registration detection assembly.
54.19 error: Check the ETB connection. Replace the ETB.
Replace the DC controller.
Calibrate the printer. See
.
54.20 error: Check the connection. Replace the colorregistration detection assembly.
54.21, 54.22, 54.23, or 54.24
error: Check the connections.
Replace the toner-level sensing
PCA. Replace the DC controller. Calibrate the printer.
See
.
312
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
54.XX.00
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
54.20.00
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
55.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
Printing cannot continue.
The CPR sensor out of range.
X values
15 = yellow
16 = magenta
17 = cyan
18 = black
Printing cannot continue.
The CPR sensor out of range.
The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter. The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection.
1.
For step-by-step information, press
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
1.
For step-by-step information, press
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
alternates with
55.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
Reseat or replace the connectors between the
DC controller and the formatter.
4.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
5.
Replace the formatter.
Initialize NVRAM. See
.
Printer-error troubleshooting
313
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
57.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer-fan error has occurred.
X Description
3 cartridge fan (vertical fan, F2)
4 formatter fan (horizontal fan,
F1)
7 power supply fan (F3; HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Turn the printer off and then on.
57.3 Cartridge fan error (F2)
1.
Reconnect the connector
J1004 on the DC controller
PCA.
2.
Immediately after starting the print operation, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the cartridge fan.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
57.4 Formatter fan error (F1)
1.
Reconnect the connector
J1003 on the DC controller
PCA.
2.
Immediately after turning the printer on, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the formatter fan.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
314
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
57.X
continued
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A memory tag error was detected.
X Description
3 CPU
4 power supply
57.5 Power supply fan error
(F3) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1.
Reconnect the connector
J1037 on the DC controller
PCA.
2.
Immediately after turning the printer on, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1037 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the power supply fan.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Replace the memory PCA.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
Printer-error troubleshooting
315
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
59.X Y
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer motor error has occurred.
X Description
0 motor error
1 motor startup error
2 motor rotation error
3 fuser motor startup error
4 fuser motor rotation error
5 print cartridge motor startup error
6 print cartridge motor rotation error
9 ETB motor startup error
A ETB motor rotation error
B developing disengaging motor startup error
C developing disengaging motor rotation error
Y Description
0 no color
K black
C cyan
M magenta
Y yellow
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed. Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed.
ETB motor error
1.
Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector,
J4017. .
2.
Reconnect the connectors
J4022 for the ETB motor,
J4017 between the ETB and the printer, and J4014 on the DC controller PCA.
3.
Replace the ETB motor.
4.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
Fuser motor error
1.
Reconnect the connectors
J4030 for the fuser motor and J1002 on the DC controller PCA.
2.
Replace the fuser drive assembly.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
316
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
59.X Y
continued
62 NO SYSTEM
To continue turn off then on
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTING CHANGE
For help press
alternates with
No system was found.
One or more printer settings that were saved in the nonvolatile storage device are invalid and have been reset to its factory default. Pressing should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
Print cartridge motor error
1.
Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the
DC controller PCA (J1013 for cyan, J1031 for magenta, J1032 for yellow, and J1033 for black).
2.
Replace the drum drive assembly for the indicated print cartridge.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
Developing disengaging motor error
1.
Reconnect the connectors
J4024 and J1019 between the developing disengaging motor and the
DC controller PCA.
2.
Replace the developing disengaging drive assembly.
3.
Replace the DC controller
PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
Reseat the firmware DIMM.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then back on.
3.
Check the printer settings to determine which settings have been changed.
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTING CHANGE
To continue press
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
Printer-error troubleshooting
317
Table 7-5. Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
For help press
alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
To continue press
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE WRITE FAIL
To continue press
A non-volatile storage device is full. Pressing should clear the message. Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A non-volatile storage device is failing to write. Pressing should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If a 68.0 error persists, perform an NVRAM inititialization.
4.
For 68.1 errors, use the
HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive.
5.
If a 68.1 errors persists, reinitialize the hard disk.
1.
Press to continue.
2.
Turn the printer off and then on.
3.
If the problem persists, initialize NVRAM.
4.
Reinitialize the hard disk.
79.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A critical hardware error has occurred.
8X.YYYY
EIO ERROR
The EIO accessory card in slot
X has encountered a critical error.
81 EIO ERROR = error in slot 1
82 EIO ERROR = error in slot 2
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
If the problem persists, reseat the firmware DIMM.
3.
Reseat the formatter.
4.
Replace the firmware
DIMM.
5.
Replace the formatter.
Calibrate the printer. See
1.
Turn the printer off and then on.
2.
If the problem persists, reseat the EIO card.
3.
Replace the EIO card.
318
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Replacement parts configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Note
When the following parts are replaced, perform the procedures in this section.
● Formatter and DC controller
● Formatter (new or previously installed in another printer)
● DC Controller (new or previously installed in another printer)
The HP Color LaserJet 4650 stores printer configuration information in the compact flash memory. Always print a configuration page before and after (wait five minutes after the printer power is turned on) installing the parts in the above list to verify that the printer configuration information is restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM.
WARNING!
Note
Formatter and DC controller
Do not replace the formatter and the DC controller at the same time. If the formatter and DC controller must both be replaced, install a replacement formatter first and make sure that you install the compact flash memory from the removed formatter on the replacement formatter
before you turn the printer power on.
If the formatter and DC controller need to be replaced, install a replacement formatter first.
The HP Color LaserJet 4650 stores printer configuration information in the compact flash memory. The compact flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter, so that printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored to the formatter and DC controller.
After replacing the formatter and installing the compact flash, turn the printer power on.
When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM.
Turn the printer power off, and replace the DC controller. Turn the printer power on. When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM.
After installing the replacement formatter and DC controller, perform a full calibration
procedure three times. See Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Formatter (new or previously installed in another printer)
The HP Color LaserJet 4650 stores printer configuration information in the compact flash memory. The compact flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter, so that printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored to the formatter and DC controller.
After replacing the formatter and installing the compact flash, turn the printer power on.
When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM.
The transfer kit page count is not reset by replacing the formatter.
ENWW Replacement parts configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
319
After installing the replacement formatter, perform a full calibration procedure three times.
See
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
DC Controller (new or previously installed in another printer)
After replacing the DC controller, turn the printer power on. When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM.
After installing the replacement DC controller, perform a quick calibration procedure three times. See
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
.
320
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Paper-path troubleshooting
Use the information in this section to troubleshoot errors in the printer paper path.
Jams
Jam error messages occur if media fails to arrive at or clear the paper-path sensors in the allowed time. Dedicated paper sensors detect whether media is present in the sensor and whether media is feeding normally. When the DC controller detects a jam, it immediately stops the printing process and the appropriate jam message appears for the sensor that
detects the jam. Sensors shows the locations of all the sensors in the printer.
Jam locations
the sections later in this chapter.
Figure 7-1.
Jam locations (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer)
1
2
3
4
5
Top cover area
Duplex path
Paper path
Paper input path
Trays
ENWW Paper-path troubleshooting
321
Figure 7-2.
2 x 500-sheet feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
1
2
Pickup area
Paper feed area
Jam locations by error message
Use
Table 7-6. Error messages and associated jam locations table to identify jam locations
and to help pinpoint and clear specific paper jams. See
Figure 7-1. Jam locations (HP Color
LaserJet 4600 Series printer) or
Figure 7-2. 2 x 500-sheet feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only) for jam locations.
322
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-6. Error messages and associated jam locations
Error message
13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY x
Jam location
5; printer
13.02.00 JAM IN TRAY x
13.09.00 JAM IN TOP COVER
AREA
4 or 5; printer
1; printer
Action
A 13.01.00 jam occurs when the paper is late in arriving at the paper leading-edge sensor
(PS3) in the paper pickup assembly. This event could be a no pick resulting in the absence of media in the paper path, or could be a sheet that was delayed and jammed somewhere in the feed area between the specified tray and the paper pickup assembly.
If the jam occurs during a multiple-page document, media might arrive in the fuser, but the jam is still a result of the media arriving late to the paper leading-edge sensor (PS3) from the specified tray. The printer will not boot up if a
13.01.00 jam occurs.
A 13.02.00 jam occurs when the paper leading-edge sensor
(PS3) has been triggered, but never clears. The media remains in the registration assembly. After opening and closing the front covers and
ETB, the printer can boot up when a 13.02.00 error exists, if the sensor is stuck or media remains in the sensor.
A 13.09.00 jam occurs when the media has successfully left the paper pick unit, cleared the paper leading-edge sensor
(PS3), and arrived at the fuser, triggering the fuser inlet paper sensor (PS11). The media folds into an accordion jam in the fuser and never triggers the fuser delivery sensor (PS12), causing a 13.09.00 error message.
WARNING!
The fuser is hot, wait 10 minutes for it to cool down.
Paper-path troubleshooting
323
Table 7-6. Error messages and associated jam locations (continued)
Error message Jam location Action
13.0A.00 JAM IN TOP COVER
AREA
1; printer A 13.0A.00 jam occurs when the printer is trying to deliver sheets to the output bin for a simplex job or, for a duplex turnaround, when the paper was late leaving or never left the fuser delivery sensor
(PS12). The media might have been incorrectly loaded in the paper trays, something in the fuser might be obstructing the media, or the sensor could be stuck or broken.
WARNING!
The fuser is hot, wait 10 minutes for it to cool down.
13.12.00 JAM IN DUPLEX
PATH
1, 2, 3; printer A 13.12.00 jam occurs when the printer is trying to print a duplex print job after the media has entered the fuser and started back down the paper path, but has never arrived at or was late getting to the paper leading-edge sensor (PS3).
The media might have been disturbed by an outside source,
(for example, someone might have grabbed the media while it was turning around), or something might be in the fuser that is obstructing the media.
Note
Jam recovery
This printer automatically provides jam recovery, a feature that you can use to set whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages. Two options are:
● AUTO. The printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages.
● OFF. The printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages.
During the recovery process, the printer might reprint several pages that were printed correctly before the jam occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages.
To disable paper jam recovery
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
324
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
6. Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY.
7. Press to select JAM RECOVERY.
8. Press to highlight OFF.
9. Press to select OFF.
10. Press the Pause/Resume (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or the MENU (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models) button to return to the READY state.
To improve print speed and increase memory resources, you might want to disable jam recovery. If jam recovery is disabled, any pages that are involved in a jam will not be reprinted.
Avoiding jams
Table 7-7. Common causes of jams
Cause
The print media does not meet HPrecommended media specifications.
A supply item is installed incorrectly, causing repeated jams.
You are reloading media that has already passed through a printer or copier.
An input tray is loaded incorrectly.
The printed pages are skewed.
Solution
Use only media that meets HP specifications.
Verify that all print cartridges, the ETB, and the fuser are correctly installed.
Do not use media that has been previously printed on or copied.
Remove any excess media from the input tray.
Press the media down in the input tray so that it fits below the tabs and within the media width guides.
The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly.
Adjust input tray guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it. If media heavier than 105 g/m
2
(28 lb) is loaded into tray
2 or tray 3, or tray 3/4, the media might skew.
The print media is binding or sticking together.
The print media is removed before it settles into the output bin.
Remove the media, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload the media into the input tray. Do not fan media.
Reset the printer. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
When duplexing, the print media is removed before the second side of the document is printed.
Reset the printer and print the document again.
Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
The print media is in poor condition.
Print media is not picked up by the internal rollers from tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/4 (2 x 500sheet feeder).
The print media has rough or jagged edges.
Replace the print media.
Remove the top sheet of media. If the media is heavier than 105 g/m 2 (28 lb), it might not be picked from the tray.
Replace the media.
Paper-path troubleshooting
325
Table 7-7. Common causes of jams (continued)
Cause Solution
The print media is perforated or embossed.
One or more printer supply items have reached the end of their useful life.
The print media was not stored correctly.
This media does not separate easily. You might need to feed single sheets from tray 1.
Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies.
Replace the print media. Media should be stored in its original packaging in a controlled environment.
Persistent jams
If jams occur repeatedly, use the information in this section to diagnose the root cause of the problem. The tables in this section list possible causes and recommended solutions for jams in each area of the paper path. Items are listed in the order that you should use to investigate. In general, items at the beginning of the list are relatively minor repairs. Items at the end of the list are more complex repairs.
Basic troubleshooting for jams
Use the following basic troubleshooting process for jams:
1. Gather data.
2. Identify the cause of the problem.
3. Fix the problem.
Data collection
To troubleshoot jams, gather the following information:
● The exact jam error code tat appears on the control-panel display
● The location of the leading edge of the media that is in the paper path
● Whether media is in the paper path when the jam occurs or in the input tray
● Whether the jam occurs at power-up or while media is moving
● Whether the media is damaged and, if it is, where the damage occurs on the paper and where in the paper path the sheet stops
● Whether the jam occurs when feeding from one particular tray
● Whether the jam occurs only when using duplex printing
● Whether a particular type of media is jamming or not jamming
● Whether any of the supplies are non-HP (non-HP supplies are known to cause jams)
● Whether the customer is storing the media correctly, overloading the trays, damaging the edge of the media during loading, or using media that has already been fed through the printer
326
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
ENWW
General paper-path troubleshooting
Use the following suggestions to isolate the cause of the problem. After you have identified the cause, use the tables in this section to find a recommended solution.
Use the paper-path test in the Diagnostics menu to print pages while troubleshooting.
● View or print the event log and determine if a particular jam error occurs more often than others. Try to identify a pattern.
● Use the event log to determine the frequency of a particular jam. If a jam occurs repeatedly at approximately the same page count, consider it a single jam that the customer tried to clear.
● Try printing from all available input trays to identify whether the problem is isolated to one tray.
● Print the job in both simplex and duplex modes to identify whether the problem occurs only in one mode or the other.
● Try printing on media from an unopened ream that has been stored correctly. If the jam does not occur with this media, then the customer's media might be causing the problem.
● If the jam occurs from when the printer is turned on, check the paper path for small, torn pieces of media. Also check for broken sensors or flags, and check for loose or defective connections.
● If the media is torn, folded, or wrinkled (typically along the leading edge), inspect the paper path for items that could be causing the damage.
● If the user is using non-HP supplies, try replacing those supplies with genuine HP supplies to see if the problem goes away.
● If necessary, instruct the user about proper media storage, correct loading technique, and printer operation. Make sure the user knows not to grab paper in the output bin during duplex printing.
Paper path checklist
□ Verify that media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly.
□ Clean the printer. Toner and paper dust in the paper path can inhibit the free movement of media through the printer and can block the sensors.
□ Use the paper-path test in the Diagnostic menu to vary the input selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer.
□ Worn rollers or separation pads can cause multifeeds. Check the condition of the pickup rollers and separation pads. Bent separation tabs (on the front corners of the input trays) can cause misfeeds and multifeeds. Replace the tray if necessary.
□ Defective paper-tray switches can cause jams by communicating the wrong paper size to the formatter.
□ Defective paper sensors along the paper path might falsely signal a jam.
□ Scraps of media that remain in the paper path can cause intermittent jams. Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing jams.
Also, remove the fuser and carefully check it for debris from jams.
Paper-path troubleshooting
327
Jams in tray 1
The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in tray 1.
Table 7-8. Causes for jams in tray 1
Cause
The pickup roller is dirty, worn, or damaged.
The separation pad is defective.
The drive gears are damaged.
The multipurpose tray pickup solenoid is defective.
The pickup motor is defective.
The paper pickup assembly is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Clean the pickup roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the pickup roller.
Clean the separation pad. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the separation pad.
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit.
Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
1.
Disconnect the connector J1020 for the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid from the
DC controller PCA.
2.
Measure the resistance between the cableside connectors J1020-11 and J1020-10.
3.
If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms, replace the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid.
Replace the paper pickup drive assembly.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Jams in tray 2
The following table describes the cause of and solutions for jams in tray 2.
Table 7-9. Causes for jams in tray 2
Cause
The separation tabs in the paper cassette are deformed.
The pickup roller is worn or damaged.
The feed roller is dirty, worn, or damaged.
Solution
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
Replace the pickup roller.
Clean the feed roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the feed roller.
328
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-9. Causes for jams in tray 2 (continued)
Cause Solution
The drive gears are damaged.
The cassette pickup solenoid is damaged.
The pickup motor is defective.
The paper pickup assembly is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit.
Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
1.
Disconnect the connector for the cassette pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCA.
2.
Measure the resistance between the cableside connectors J1020-13 and J1020-12.
3.
If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms, replace the cassette pickup solenoid.
Replace the paper pickup drive assembly.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Jams in tray 3 or tray 3/4 (2 x 500-sheet paper feeder)
The following table describes the cause of and solutions for jams in tray 3 or 3/4.
Table 7-10. Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3/4 (2 x 500-sheet paper feeder)
Cause
The separation tabs in the paper cassette are deformed.
The pickup roller is worn or damaged.
The feed roller is dirty, worn, or damaged.
The drive gears are damaged.
The connector to the printer has poor contact.
The paper feeder pickup solenoid is damaged.
The pickup motor is defective.
Solution
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
Replace the pickup roller.
Clean the feed roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the feed roller.
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit.
Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
Reconnect all of the connectors to the printer.
Replace any damaged connectors.
1.
Disconnect the connector J4006 for the paper feeder solenoid from the paper feeder
PCA.
2.
Measure the resistance between the cableside connectors J4006-2 and J4006-1.
3.
If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms, replace the paper feeder pickup solenoid.
Replace the paper pickup drive assembly.
Paper-path troubleshooting
329
Table 7-10. Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3/4 (2 x 500-sheet paper feeder) (continued)
Cause Solution
The paper feeder PCA is defective.
The paper pickup assembly is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the paper feeder PCA.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Jams in the paper path
The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in the paper path.
Table 7-11. Causes for jams in the paper path
Cause
The registration shutter is defective.
(This applies to jams that occur before the registration roller.)
The drive gears are damaged.
(This applies to jams that occur in advance of the registration roller.)
The registration roller and registration sub roller are dirty, worn, or damaged.
(This applies to jams that occur in advance of the registration roller.)
The attaching roller is damaged.
(This applies to jams in which media is crumpled into an accordion when it enters the ETB.)
Solution
Make sure that the shutter is clean and moves smoothly, and that the spring is in place. If the shutter is damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit.
Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
Clean the registration roller or registration subroller if it is dirty. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
The cartridge shutter open/close mechanism is damaged.
(This applies to jams in which media is crumpled into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt.)
The shutters in each print cartridge should open as you close the ETB. If a shutter does not open, replace that print cartridge. Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer.
The cartridge drive motor assembly is damaged.
Inspect the cartridge drive assembly in each print cartridge. If any are damaged, replace the assembly for that print cartridge.
The attaching roller is defective.
The paper leading edge sensor is defective.
Check the attaching roller to see if it is damaged.
If it is damaged, replace the ETB. Calibrate the
printer after replacing the ETB. See Calibrate
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
.
Make sure that the attaching roller is clean and the spring is in place. If the roller is damaged, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Replace the pickup PCA.
330
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-11. Causes for jams in the paper path (continued)
Cause Solution
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Jams in the top cover
The following table describes the causes of and solutions for jams in the top cover.
Table 7-12. Causes for jams in the top cover
Cause
The fuser paper sensor or sensor lever is defective.
The fuser sleeve or pressure roller does not rotate smoothly.
The fuser inlet guide is dirty or is covered with toner.
The fuser sleeve or pressure roller is dirty, worn, or damaged.
The fuser delivery sensor or sensor lever is defective.
The fuser delivery roller is worn.
The fuser delivery roller drive gears are worn or damaged.
The face-down delivery roller is defective.
DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Make sure that the fuser paper sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place. Replace the lever if it is damaged. Replace the sensor if it is defective.
If the fuser drive gears are worn or damaged, replace the fuser.
Clean the fuser inlet guide.
Clean the fuser sleeve or pressure roller. If it is damaged, replace the fuser.
Make sure that the fuser delivery sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place. Replace the lever if it is damaged. Replace the sensor if it is defective.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Jams in the duplex path
The following table describes the causes of and solution for jams in the duplex path.
Table 7-13. Causes for jams in the duplex path
Cause
The oblique rollers are worn or damaged.
Solution
Replace the oblique rollers.
Paper-path troubleshooting
331
Table 7-13. Causes for jams in the duplex path (continued)
Cause Solution
The oblique roller drive gears are worn or damaged.
The duplex feed guide is damaged.
Replace the ETB unit. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
.
Replace the ETB unit. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
.
332
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Paper transport troubleshooting
If media is feeding incorrectly, use the information in this section to identify and resolve the problem.
Multiple pages are fed
The following table describes the causes of and solutions for multiple pages feeding.
Table 7-14. Causes for multiple pages feeding
Cause
The separation tabs in the cassette are damaged (tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/4 [2 x 500 sheet feeder]).
The multipurpose tray separation pad is worn.
The multipurpose tray separation pad has a defective spring.
Solution
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
Replace the separation pad assembly.
Make sure that the spring is set in place. If the spring is damaged, replace the separation pad assembly.
Media is wrinkled or folded
To diagnose the cause of wrinkled or folded media, use the Print/Stop test in the
Diagnostics menu. Adjust the stop time to stop the media before it enters the fuser. Open the ETB. If the media is wrinkled at this stage, use
stage, use
Table 7-15. Causes for wrinkled or folded media (part one: paper-path entrance)
to diagnose the problem.
Table 7-15. Causes for wrinkled or folded media (part one: paper-path entrance)
Cause
The registration shutter is defective.
Solution
Make sure that the registration shutter is clean and moves smoothly. If the registration shutter is worn or damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
The feed roller or registration roller is dirty or defective.
The paper path has foreign substances or dirt.
The cartridge shutter open/close mechanism is damaged.
(This applies to jams in which paper is crumpled into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt.)
Remove any foreign substances or dirt from the paper path. If the feed guide is damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
The shutters in each print cartridge should open as you close the ETB. If a shutter does not open, replace that print cartridge. Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer.
ENWW Paper transport troubleshooting
333
Table 7-16. Causes for wrinkled or folded paper (part two: paper-path exit)
Cause
The fuser inlet guide is dirty.
The fuser pressure roller is dirty or damaged.
The fuser sleeve is dirty or damaged.
The fuser delivery roller is dirty.
Solution
Clean the fuser inlet guide.
Clean the pressure roller. If the pressure roller is damaged, replace the fuser.
Clean the fuser sleeve. If the fuser sleeve is damaged, replace the fuser.
Clean the fuser delivery roller.
Paper is skewed
Table 7-17. Causes for skewed paper
Cause
The paper dust or dirt has accumulated in the cassette feed roller or registration roller.
The cassette feed roller and registration roller are worn irregularly.
The separation tabs in the cassette are damaged (tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/4 [2 x 500sheet feeder]).
The registration shutter is defective.
Solution
Clean the rollers.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
Make sure that the registration shutter moves smoothly, its spring is in place, and it is clean. If the registration shutter is damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
334
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Image-formation troubleshooting
The image-formation system is the central hub of the printer. During image formation, an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper. The image-formation system consists of the following physical components:
● Four laser/scanners
● Four print cartridges
● ETB
● Fuser
Before beginning image-formation troubleshooting, check that the media meets the specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
Note
Print-quality troubleshooting tools (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Go to www.hp.com/cpso-support-new/pq/4650/4650home.html
to identify and troubleshoot print-quality issues for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printers as well as to show customers and service personnel how to troubleshoot print-quality issues. This Web site suggests solutions for eight print-quality issues. It includes a tool that uses standard images in order to ensure that the support agent and the customer have a common diagnostic method for isolating the issue.
You can also visit the Web site from
by using the following procedure.
Open the HP CLJ 4650 print-quality troubleshooting Web site
page, click Support & Drivers.
2. Type “CLJ4650” in the open text field, and then click the forward arrows.
3. Click the product name in the list that is provided.
4. Click print quality troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics in the box to the right of the screen.
The customer can also go to
to find the print quality
troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics.
These Web sites provide intuitive, step-by-step directions for producing print-quality troubleshooting pages that can be used to isolate issues and provide possible print-quality solutions.
Print-quality problems associated with media
Some print-quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media.
● Use media that meets HP specifications.
● The surface of the media is too smooth. See
.
● The printer driver is set incorrectly. Change the paper-type setting to HEAVY or GLOSSY.
● The media that you are using is too heavy for the printer, and the toner is not fusing to the media.
ENWW Image-formation troubleshooting
335
Note
● The transparencies that you are using are not designed for correct toner adhesion. Use only transparencies that are designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.
● The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper.
● Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper.
● The letterhead that you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this solves your problem, consult with the printer who produces your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer.
● The paper is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic paper.
Overhead transparency defects
Overhead transparencies can show any of the image-quality problems that appear on any other type of media, as well as defects that are specific to printing on transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are pliable while in the print path, they are subject to being marked by the media-handling components.
Allow transparencies to cool for at least 30 seconds before handling them.
● In the printer driver Paper tab, select Transparency as the media type. Also, make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
●
Guide.
● Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges.
● Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid-fill pages can be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
● The printed colors are unacceptable. Select different colors in the software program or printer driver.
● If you are using a reflective overhead projector, use a standard overhead projector instead.
Print-quality problems that are associated with the environment
Print-quality problems can occur if the printer is operating in excessively humid or dry
336
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Print-quality problems that are associated with jams
Take the following actions to prevent problems that are associated with printer jams.
● To avoid problems after a jam, make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path.
● If the printer recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the printer.
● If the media does not pass through the fuser, image defects might appear on subsequent documents. Print two to three pages to clean the printer. If the problem persists, see the next section to print a troubleshooting page.
Print-quality troubleshooting pages
Use the built-in print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
5. Press to print the pages.
The printer returns to the Ready state after you print the print-quality troubleshooting pages.
Understanding color variations
The printed output might not match the computer screen, and the colors printed on successive pages might not match. While color variations are inherent in this printing method, they can indicate changes in the printing environment, print media, or printer components.
Common causes of color variation
The following list outlines the major causes of color variations between computers, programs, and output devices.
● Halftone patterns that are produced on monitors and the types of patterns that are used in the print jobs are different and might cause variations in the printed output.
● The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because the monitor and the print media have different reference values of black and white. The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the black level, and the white on the monitor screen is actually blue.
Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of the printer, and most goodquality paper has a very high white level. In addition, phosphor (used in color monitors) and toner have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color-rendering capabilities. Differences between output are common. Blues generally match better than reds.
● The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color. Fluorescent light lacks many colors that are present in incandescent light, and the color range of natural light is broader than any artificial light. When comparing color, choose a standard light source for reference and understand that the perceived color will change as the light changes.
Image-formation troubleshooting
337
● Long-term color variations occur as paper ages. Use high-quality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize discoloration.
● Environmental changes can cause color variation. The development process places a high potential across an air gap to attract toner to the imaging drum. Changes in relative humidity vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum.
● All consumable components have a finite life span. As these components reach the end of their useful life, their ability to produce consistent print quality diminishes.
● Paper roughness can cause colors to look different. Use standard paper.
Color selection process
The user selects the color in the program, but the operating system might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before sending the information to the printer driver. The printer driver might also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output mode.
Any color characteristics that the printer driver or programs do not address are set to the printer default. The default color might not match the color the user selected.
Matching colors
PANTONE
®
* color matching
PANTONE ® * has multiple color-matching systems. PANTONE ® * Matching System is very popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See
for details about how to use PANTONE ® * Matching System with this printer.
Swatch book color matching
The process for matching printer output to preprinted swatch books and standard color references is complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a swatch book if the inks that are used to create the swatch book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color swatch books.
Some swatch books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of these spot colors are outside of the gamut of the printer. Most spot color swatch books have companion process swatch books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color.
Most process swatch books have a note about what process standards were used to print the swatch book. In most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process swatch book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu. If you cannot identify the process standard, use SWOP ink emulation.
Using color
HP ImageREt 2400 (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
HP ImageREt 2400 is a technology that provides the best color-print quality without having to change driver settings or make trade-offs among print quality, performance, and memory.
338
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
HP ImageREt 2400 has been improved for this printer. The improvements offer trapping technologies, even greater control over dot placement, and more precise control of toner quality in a dot. These new technologies, coupled with HP's multilevel printing process, result in a 600-by-600 dpi printer that provides 2400-dpi color laser-class quality with millions of smooth colors.
HP ImageREt 3600 (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system that HP developed to deliver superior print quality and technological innovation. The HP ImageREt system incorporates technology that optimizes each element of the print system.
Several categories of HP ImageREt have been developed that meet a variety of user needs.
The system is comprised of key laser technologies for color printing, including image enhancements, smart supplies, and high-resolution imaging. The ImageREt core technologies are refined in higher level systems for more advanced system users, and additional technologies are integrated.
The HP ImageREt 3600 is a complete HP proprietary printing solution, developed and implemented for the first time in the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. HP now offers superior image enhancements for general office and marketing documents. HP ImageREt 3600 performs well in different environmental conditions and with a variety of media, and the image mode is optimized for printing on HP High Gloss Laser Paper.
Paper selection
For the best color and image quality, select the appropriate media type from the printer menu or from the front panel.
sRGB
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a world-wide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital cameras), and output devices (printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft operating systems, the World Wide Web, and most office software that is sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical Windows computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high-definition television.
Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room's lighting can affect the
appearance of colors on your screen. For more information, see Matching colors
.
The latest versions of Adobe ® PhotoShop ® , CorelDRAW ® , Microsoft Office, and many other programs use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in
Microsoft operating systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between programs and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to match colors among the printer, the computer monitor and other input devices (scanner, digital camera) automatically, without the need to become a color expert.
Color options
Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents.
ENWW Image-formation troubleshooting
339
Note
Note
Color options use object tagging, which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects (text, graphics, and photos) on a page. The printer driver determines which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object. Object tagging, combined with optimized default settings, produces great color out of the box.
In the Windows environment, the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer driver.
Setting color options to Automatic will typically produce the best possible print quality for color documents. However, situations might occur when you want to print a color document in grayscale (black and white) or want to change one of the printer's color options.
● Using Windows, print in grayscale or change the color options by using settings on the
Color tab in the printer driver.
● Using a Macintosh computer, print in grayscale or change the color options by using the
Color Matching pop-up menu in the Print dialog box.
Print in Grayscale
Selecting the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver prints a document by using black toner. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output, or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.
Automatic or manual color adjustment
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge enhancements used for each element in a document. For more information, see your printer driver online Help.
Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents.
Use the Manual color adjustment option to adjust the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge enhancements for text, graphics and photographs. To gain access the Manual color options, on the Color tab, select Manual, and then select Settings.
Manual color options
Use manual color adjustment to adjust the Color (or Color Map) and Halftone options individually for text, graphics, and photographs.
Some programs convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, the Photographs settings also controls text and graphics.
Halftone options
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two halftone options are
Smooth and Detail.
● The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills are top priority.
● The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority.
340
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
CAUTION
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors used in text, graphics, and photographs.
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:
● Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This guarantees neutrals colors without a color cast.
● 4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors.
This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest black.
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color plane registration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly.
Four levels of edge control are available:
● Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning is on for this setting.
● Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on.
● Light sets trapping at a minimal level, and adaptive halftoning is on.
● Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning.
RGB Color
Two values are available for the RGB Color setting:
● Default instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB. sRGB is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization (www).
● Vivid instructs the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for the printing business graphics
● Device instructs the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render photographs properly with this selection, you must manage image color in the program or operating system.
Adjusting color balance
This printer features automatic color calibration to provide high-quality color output. In situations that require critical color control, you can manually adjust the density balance of the four toner colors. The available range for each color is from -5 to +5. The default value is
0.
This procedure should only be performed by your network administrator. Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering halftones, and affects all print jobs.
ENWW Image-formation troubleshooting
341
To adjust color density
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE menu.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE menu.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press or to highlight ADJUST COLOR.
7. Press to select ADJUST COLOR.
8. Press or to highlight the desired color.
9. Press to select the desired color.
10. Press or to highlight the correct density setting.
11. Press to select the density setting.
12. Press to set the density for the next color.
13. After setting the density for each color, press Pause/Resume (HP Color LasrJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models).
342
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Image defects
If specific defects occur repeatedly, print a Print Quality Troubleshooting page and follow the instructions on the page. If you are unable to resolve the problem, use the information in this section to identify the root cause of the problem.
Image defects fall into the categories that are listed in
. Possible causes and recommended solutions for each of these categories are listed in the tables that follow. In general, the items are listed in order from minor repairs to major repairs. Check the items in the order in which they appear.
Table 7-18. Image defects
Image defect
Light image
Light color
Dark image
Dark color
Completely blank
All black/solid color
Dots in vertical lines
Dirt on back of paper
Dirt on front of paper
Vertical lines
White vertical lines
Horizontal lines
White horizontal lines
Missing color
Blank spots
Poor fusing
Distortion or blurring
Smearing
Description
A very light image is printed.
One color is light in an image.
A very dark image is printed.
One color is dark in an image.
No image is printed.
An all black or solid colored image is printed.
Vertical lines of white dots appear in the image.
More information
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
.
.
The back (non-printed) side of the paper is dirty.
The front (printed) sided of the paper is dirty.
Vertical lines are printed.
White vertical lines appear in the image.
Horizontal lines are printed.
White horizontal lines appear in the image.
One of the four toner colors is not printing.
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
Dirt on the back of the paper .
Dirt on the front of the paper
.
.
The image has blank spots.
Toner is loose on the printed image.
See
See
The image appears distorted, or colors seem out of alignment.
See
.
The image is smeared or dirty.
See
ENWW Image defects
343
Table 7-18. Image defects (continued)
Image defect Description
Misplaced image The image is placed incorrectly on the page.
More information
See
Light image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light images.
Table 7-19. Causes for light images
Cause
The image density is not adjusted correctly.
A poor contact in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high-voltage PCA.
The attaching roller is worn or damaged.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Increase the density for each color.
Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged.
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Light color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light color.
Table 7-20. Causes for light color
Cause
A poor contact exists in the transfer bias contacts between the ETB and the printer.
Solution
Clean the contacts for the affected color. If the contacts are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged, replace the contacts or the ETB.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged.
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
The photosensitive drum is worn.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
344
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-20. Causes for light color (continued)
Cause Solution
The laser/scanner unit is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the laser/scanner for the affected color.
See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Dark image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark images.
Table 7-21. Causes for dark images
Cause
The image density is not adjusted correctly.
The color-registration detection unit is dirty.
Solution
Decrease the density for each color.
Clean the lens on the color-registration detection unit.
The color-registration detection unit is defective.
Replace the color-registration detection unit.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Dark color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark color.
Table 7-22. Causes for dark colors
Cause
A poor contact exists in the drum ground, primary charging bias, and developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCA and the print cartridge.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the cartridge.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Image defects
345
Completely blank image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for completely blank pages.
Table 7-23. Causes for a completely blank image
Cause
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
All black or solid color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for all black or solid color.
Table 7-24. Causes for an all black or solid colored image
Cause
A poor contact exists in the drum ground, primary charging bias, and developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCA and the print cartridge.
The primary charging roller is defective.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the cartridge.
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Dots in vertical lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dots in vertical lines.
Table 7-25. Causes for vertical lines of white dots
Cause Solution
The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged.
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
346
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-25. Causes for vertical lines of white dots (continued)
Cause Solution
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Dirt on the back of the paper
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dirt on the back of the paper.
Table 7-26. Causes for dirt on the back of the paper
Cause
One or more of the rollers are dirty.
The pickup roller is dirty.
Solution
See Repetitive defects troubleshooting
for information about identifying the roller that might be dirty. Clean the indicated roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the appropriate roller, cartridge, or assembly.
Clean the roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the pickup roller assembly.
Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged.
A poor contact exists in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high-voltage
PCA.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Dirt on the front of the paper
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dirt on the front of the paper.
Table 7-27. Causes for dirt on the front of the paper
Cause
One or more of the rollers are dirty.
The pickup roller is dirty.
Solution
See Repetitive defects troubleshooting
for information about identifying the roller that might be dirty. Clean the indicated roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the appropriate roller, cartridge, or assembly.
Clean the roller. If is still dirty after cleaning, replace the pickup roller assembly.
Image defects
347
Table 7-27. Causes for dirt on the front of the paper (continued)
Cause Solution
A poor contact exists in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high-voltage
PCA.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Vertical lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for vertical lines.
Table 7-28. Causes for vertical lines
Cause
The photosensitive drum has grooves around the circumference.
The fuser sleeve has grooves around the circumference.
Solution
Replace the cartridge that indicates the color of the vertical lines.
Replace the fuser.
White vertical lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white vertical lines.
Table 7-29. Causes for white vertical lines
Cause
The developing cylinder has grooves around the circumference.
The photosensitive drum has grooves around the circumference.
The laser is blocked by a foreign substance.
The mirror in the laser/scanner unit is dirty.
The fuser sleeve is scarred vertically. (All colors are affected.)
Solution
Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear.
Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear.
Inspect the laser source for the affected color, and remove any debris that might be blocking it.
Replace the laser/scanner for the color in which the white lines appear. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the laser/scanner. See Calibrate Now
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
.
Replace the fuser.
348
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Horizontal lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for horizontal lines.
Table 7-30. Causes for horizontal lines
Cause
The photosensitive drum has scars that run from end to end.
The fuser sleeve has scars that run from end to end.
Solution
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
Replace the fuser.
White horizontal lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white horizontal lines.
Table 7-31. Causes for white horizontal lines
Cause
The photosensitive drum has scars that run from end to end.
The ETB belt has horizontal scars.
Solution
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Missing color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for missing color.
Table 7-32. Causes for a missing color
Cause
A poor contact exists in the developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCA and the print cartridge.
The primary charging roller is defective.
The laser/scanner unit is defective.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
Solution
Clean the contacts. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the print cartridge or the high-voltage contacts.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the print cartridge for the missing color.
Replace the laser/scanner for the missing color.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
scanner. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color
.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Image defects
349
Table 7-32. Causes for a missing color (continued)
Cause Solution
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Blank spots
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for blank spots.
Table 7-33. Causes for blank spots
Cause
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Poor fusing
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for poor fusing.
Table 7-34. Causes for poor fusing
Cause
The media is not within specifications. For example, media that is too thick causes poor fusing.
The fuser is not within nip-width specifications.
The fuser sleeve is scarred or damaged.
The pressure roller is scarred or damaged.
The thermistor has deteriorated.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Use media that meets specifications. See chapter 1.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Distortion or blurring
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for distortion or blurring.
350
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-35. Causes for distortion or blurring
Cause Solution
The color-plane registration is out of specification. Calibrate the printer from the Print Quality menu. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color
.
The ETB is defective.
If the ETB belt does not rotate smoothly, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the
ETB. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color
.
The ETB motor drive gear is worn or damaged.
Replace the ETB motor.
The drum motor drive gear is worn or damaged.
Replace the drum motor for the affected color.
The color-registration detection unit is defective.
Replace the color registration detection unit.
The laser/scanner unit is defective.
Replace the laser/scanner for the affected color.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
scanner. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color
.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Smearing
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for smearing.
Table 7-36. Causes for smearing
Cause
A poor contact exists in the printer ground and cartridge ground contacts.
The fuser inlet guide is dirty or contains debris.
The cartridge shutters are not opening.
Solution
Clean each print-cartridge ground contact and the printer ground contact. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the cartridge, or replace the printer ground contact.
Clean the fuser inlet guide.
Make sure the cartridge shutter bar is operating correctly.
Misplaced image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for misplaced images.
Image defects
351
CAUTION
Note
Table 7-37. Causes for misplaced image
Cause
The media is skewed.
The oblique rollers are worn (this issue applies to duplex printing only).
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
to resolve the skew.
Replace the oblique rollers.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Repetitive defects troubleshooting
Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page. Use the repetitive defects ruler on the next page (
Figure 7-3. Repetitive defects ruler
) to measure the distance between defects that recur on a page. Use the Table 7-38.
Repetitive defect spacing table to determine which roller is causing the defect. To resolve
the problem, try cleaning the roller first. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged, replace the indicated part.
Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with lint-free paper. If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with lint-free paper that has been dampened with rubbing alcohol.
The letter codes before certain roller names in
Table 7-38. Repetitive defect spacing
correspond to the letters at the top of the repetitive defects ruler in
Figure 7-3. Repetitive defects ruler (1 of 2) . Not all rollers are shown in the ruler.
Defects on the cassette or the multipurpose-tray pickup roller cause defects only on the leading edge of the image.
Table 7-38. Repetitive defect spacing
Roller Distance
A Toner charging roller 14 mm
B Developing cylinder 33 mm
C Primary charging roller
38 mm
D Toner feed roller 39 mm
E Media attaching roller 38 mm
F Fuser pressure roller 63 mm
G Photosensitive drum or transfer rollers
(center-to-center distance)
75 mm
Type of defect Replacement part
Print cartridge
Defect on front of paper Print cartridge
Blank spots Print cartridge
Print cartridge
Defect on front of paper ETB
Poor fusing Fuser
Any print cartridges that have a damaged photosensitive drum or the ETB
352
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-38. Repetitive defect spacing (continued)
Roller Distance
H Photosensitive drum 94 mm
Type of defect Replacement part
Defect on front of paper
Blank spots
Print cartridge
J Fuser sleeve
Cassette feed roller
107 mm
54 mm
Cassette feed sub roller 44 mm
Registration roller 54 mm
Registration sub roller 57 mm
Fuser delivery roller 38 mm
49 mm Face-down delivery roller
Cassette pickup roller
Multipurpose-tray pickup roller
See the note above this table
See the note above this table
Poor fusing Fuser
Defect on front of paper Cassette
Defect on back of paper Cassette
Defect on back of paper Paper pickup assembly
Defect on front of paper Paper pickup assembly
Defect on back of paper Fuser
Defect on back of paper Fuser
Defect on front of paper Paper pickup rollers
Defect on back of paper Multipurpose-tray pickup roller assembly
ENWW Image defects
353
Figure 7-3.
Repetitive defects ruler (1 of 2)
354
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
Figure 7-3. Repetitive defects ruler (1 of 2) might not print to scale and should only be used
as a reference tool.
Figure 7-4.
Repetitive defects ruler (2 of 2)
ENWW Image defects
355
Interface troubleshooting
Note
CAUTION
Communications checks
Communication problems are normally the customer's responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the Hewlett-Packard Company warranty.
Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems.
If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host, proceed to the Table 7-39.
table.
Table 7-39. Communications check
Check
Is your computer configured to the parameters that are described in the configuration instructions?
Action
These parameters are required in order to communicate with the printer. Verify that the configuration of the computer's communications port matches these parameters.
Note
If these parameters are not set correctly, an error message might appear on the control-panel display.
EIO troubleshooting
If the printer contains an optional HP Jetdirect print server, and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network, verify the operation of the print server. Print a configuration page. If the Jetdirect card does not appear under "Installed personalities and options" on the configuration page, see the troubleshooting section of the HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide.
If the host system and printer are still not communicating, replace the formatter PCA and the
EIO card and reconfigure the printer. If the problem persists, a protocol analyzer might be needed in order to find the source of the problem.
HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch-box products that do not offer the correct surge protection. These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCA. This circumstance is not covered by the
Hewlett-Packard Company warranty.
AUTOEXEC.BAT standard configurations
Parallel MS-DOS commands
Ensure that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications:
356
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
MODE LPT1: ,,P
For MS-DOS version 4.0 and above:
MODE LPT1: ,,B
This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1. If you are using LPT2 or
LPT3, replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port.
Printer Job Language (PJL) commands
See the HP Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual for a complete description of PJL commands. This manual is available with the HP PCL/PJL reference set on CD-ROM (part number 5021-0337).
@PJL [Enter]
This command enables the specified printer language. If the printer does not receive this command, it enables the default language. This ensures the correct operation for programs that do not support PJL. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL [Enter] LANGUAGE = {PCL/PostScript} [<CR>] <LF>
UEL
This command (also referred to as the universal exit language command) terminates the current printer language and returns control to PJL. It performs the following actions:
● Prints all data that was received before this command.
● Performs a reset: <esc>E in PCL, <cntrl>D in PostScript.
● Turns control over to PJL.
This command is also a valid HP-GL/2 terminator.
The UEL command must be immediately followed by the "@PJL" command prefix.
Characters or control codes other than @PJL (such as <CR> or <LF>) enable the default language and process the print job in that language. All jobs must begin and end with the
UEL command. In addition to starting PJL, the UEL command creates the same effect as the
<esc>E command. However, the <esc>E command should always be included to ensure backward compatibility.
@PJL COMMENT
This command designates the current line as a comment, which is ignored. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL COMMENT <words> [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL INFO CONFIG
This command solicits a response to describe the installed options and allows the printer to configure the installed options automatically to meet the program requirements.
ENWW Interface troubleshooting
357
@PJL INFO ID
This command identifies the printer type to the host for reference when selecting printer drivers for automatic installation. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL INFO ID <CR> <LF>
@PJL INFO USTATUS
This command queries the state of unsolicited JOB status. PAGE and TIMED status are not supported. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL INFO USTATUS <CR> <LF>
@PJL INFO PAGECOUNT
This command returns the number of pages that have been printed by the engine.
@PJL JOB
This command informs the printer of the start of a PJL job and synchronizes the job-status information. The printer counts print jobs, including nested jobs, incrementing the job counter for the @PJL JOB command and decrementing it for @PJL EOJ.
The printer accepts the NAME= parameter and returns the name string in the unsolicited
JOB start status message (if the unsolicited job status is enabled). The printer transmits the unsolicited JOB status message to every I/O channel that has enabled this function. The following is the message format:
@PJL USTATUS JOB <CR><LF>START<CR><LF>[NAME=<job name><CR><LF>]<FF>
The printer resets the nested job counter whenever it switches the source to a different I/O channel. This prevents a corrupt job on one channel from disrupting the activities on another channel.
@PJL EOJ
This command identifies the end of a print job and is a hint for the I/O switching algorithm.
The printer counts nested jobs and recognizes job boundaries when the counter decrements to zero. The printer ignores isolated EOJ commands. Each EOJ must be preceded by a JOB command.
@PJL ECHO
This printer supports the ECHO command, which transmits its parameters over the I/O channel to the host that issued the command.
@PJL USTATUS JOB=ON/OFF
This command enables or disables the JOB status for the I/O channel that delivers the command.
358
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
@PJL USTATUSOFF
This command disables the unsolicited JOB status for the I/O channel that delivered the command. For this printer, it duplicates the function of @PJL USTATUS JOB=OFF, AND
@PJL USTATUS DEVICE=OFF.
All commands that this printer's PJL command set does not support are returned with the message @PJL xxxx<CR><LF>?<CR><LF>.
ENWW Interface troubleshooting
359
Control-panel troubleshooting
When you press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the menus, the high-level menus appear in the following order:
● RETRIEVE JOB (this menu appears only if a hard disk is installed)
●
INFORMATION
●
PAPER HANDLING
●
CONFIGURE DEVICE
●
DIAGNOSTICS
●
SERVICE
A menu map shows how individual items are configured within each of these menus.
7-5. HP Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map shows a sample of one page of the menu
map. The menu map prints on six pages. The final page gives instructions about how to use the control-panel buttons.
Printing a menu map
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT MENU MAP.
5. Press to select PRINT MENU MAP.
Figure 7-5.
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map
360
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-6.
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models menu map
Information menu
Use the Information menu to gain access to and print specific printer information.
Table 7-40. Information menu
Menu item
PRINT MENU MAP
PRINT CONFIGURATION
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS
SUPPLIES STATUS
PRINT USAGE
PRINT DEMO
PRINT RGB SAMPLES (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models)
Description
Prints the control-panel menu map, which shows the layout of and current settings for the controlpanel menu items.
Prints the printer configuration page.
Prints the estimated remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics for the total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge manufacture date, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information.
Shows the supplies status in a searchable list.
Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count.
Prints a demonstration page.
Prints color samples for different RGB values.
The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
ENWW Control-panel troubleshooting
361
Note
Table 7-40. Information menu (continued)
Menu item
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models)
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
PRINT PS FONT LIST
Description
Prints color samples for different CMYK values.
The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
Prints the name and directory of files that are stored in the printer on an optional hard disk.
Prints the available PCL fonts.
Prints the available PS (emulated PostScript) fonts.
Paper handling menu
Use the Paper handling menu to configure input trays by size and type. This menu can also be used to set default media size and type. It is important to configure the trays correctly with this menu before you print for the first time.
If you have used previous HP LaserJet printers, you might be accustomed to configuring tray
1 to first mode or cassette mode. To mimic the settings for first mode, configure tray 1 for
SIZE = ANY and TYPE = ANY. To mimic the settings for cassette mode, set either the size or type for tray 1 to a setting other than ANY.
Table 7-41. Paper handling menu
Menu item
TRAY 1 SIZE
TRAY 1 TYPE
TRAY <N> SIZE
(N = 2, 3, or 4)
Note
A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500-sheet feeder is used with the HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models.
TRAY <N> TYPE
(N = 2, 3, or 4)
Note
A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500-sheet feeder is used with the HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models.
Value Description
A list of available sizes appears. Use this item to configure the media size for tray 1. The default value is ANY.
A list of available types appears. Use this item to configure the media type for tray 1. The default value is ANY.
A list of available sizes appears. Use this item to configure the media size for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4. The default setting is the size that is detected by the guides in the tray. To use a custom size, move the switch in the tray to custom.
A list of available types appears. Use this item to configure the media type for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4. The default is PLAIN.
362
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Configure device menu
The Configure device menu has several submenus. Use these submenus to change the printer's default printing settings, adjust the print quality, change the system configuration and I/O options, and reset the printer to its default settings.
Printing menu
The settings in the Printing menu affect only jobs that do not have identified properties.
Most jobs identify all of the properties and override the values from this menu.
Table 7-42. Printing submenu
Menu item
COPIES
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER
SIZE
DUPLEX
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER
MANUAL FEED
COURIER FONT
WIDE A4
PRINT PS ERRORS
PRINT PDF ERRORS
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Values
1 to 32000
Description
Use this item to set the default number of copies.
A list of available sizes appears. Use this item to set the default media size.
UNIT OF MEASURE x DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
OFF
ON
Use this item to set the default size for any job without dimensions.
NO
YES
ON
OFF
REGULAR
DARK
Use this item to enable or disable the duplex function on models that have duplexing capability.
Use this item to set the printer to print an A4 job on letter-size paper when no A4 paper is loaded.
Use this item to manually feed media.
Use this item to select a version of the Courier font.
NO
YES
Use this item to change the printable area of A4 paper so that eighty 10-pitch characters may be printed on a single line.
Use this item to select to print
PS error pages.
Use this item to select to print
PDF error pages.
Control-panel troubleshooting
363
Table 7-42. Printing submenu (continued)
Menu item Values
PCL
FORM LENGTH
ORIENTATION
FONT SOURCE
FONT NUMBER
FONT PITCH
SYMBOL SET
APPEND CR TO LF
Description
Use this item to configure settings for the printer control language.
Print quality menu
Use the Print quality menu to adjust all aspects of print quality, including calibration, registration, and color halftone settings.
Table 7-43. Print quality submenu
Menu item
ADJUST COLOR
SET REGISTRATION
Note
A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500-sheet feeder is used with the HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models.
PRINT MODES
Values
CYAN DENSITY
MAGENTA DENSITY
YELLOW DENSITY
BLACK DENSITY
RESTORE COLOR VALUES
PRINT TEST PAGE SOURCE
ADJUST TRAY 1
ADJUST TRAY 2
ADJUST TRAY 3
ADJUST TRAY 4
A list of available modes appears.
OPTIMIZE
REDUCE (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models)
BACKGROUND
TRANSFER
STORE
OPTIMIZE
Description
Use this item to modify the halftone settings for each color.
Use this item for simplex and duplex image alignment.
Use this item to associate each media type with a specific print mode.
Use this item to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type.
CALIBRATE NOW (HP
LaserJet 4600 models)
Use this item to perform all printer calibrations: D-Max, D-
Half, color plane registration, and drum phase adjustment
364
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-43. Print quality submenu (continued)
Menu item Values
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW (HP
LaserJet 4650 models)
FULL CALIBRATE NOW (HP
LaserJet 4650 models)
Description
Use this item to perform a partial printer calibration (D-
Max and D-Half) used for color tone correction.
Use this item to perform a full printer calibration which includes D-max, D-Half, drum phase calibration, and color plane registration.
System setup menu
The System setup menu allows you to make changes to general printer configuration default settings such as PowerSave Time, printer personality (language), and jam recovery.
Table 7-44. System setup submenu
Menu item
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
Values
1 to 100
JOB HELD TIMEOUT
SHOW ADDRESS
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
OFF
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
AUTO
OFF
Description
Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the hard disk at the printer.
Sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting them from the queue.
COLOR/MONO MIx =
AUTO
MOSTLY COLOR PAGES
MOSTLY BLACK PAGES
This item determines whether the printer's IP address is shown on the display with the
Ready message. If more than one EIO card is installed, the IP address of the card in the first slot is shown. The default is off.
Use AUTO to reset the printer to the factory default setting, which is MOSTLY COLOR.
Use MOSTLY COLOR PAGES to turn on the NEVER SWITCH behavior that maximizes performance.
Use MOSTLY BLACK PAGES to turn on the LOOK AHEAD
FIRST behavior that improves cost per page as much as possible while minimizing any impact to performance.
Control-panel troubleshooting
365
Table 7-44. System setup submenu (continued)
Menu item
TRAY BEHAVIOR
POWERSAVE TIME
PERSONALITY
CLEARABLE WARNINGS
AUTO CONTINUE
SUPPLIES LOW
COLOR SUPPLY LOW
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
JAM RECOVERY
LANGUAGE
Values
USE REQUESTED TRAY
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT
Settings depend on the printer model.
AUTO
PCL
PS
MIME
ON
JOB
ON
OFF
CONTINUE
STOP
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK
STOP
1 to 100
AUTO
ON
OFF
A list of available languages appears.
Description
Use this item to specify settings for the tray-selection behavior.
(Use this setting to configure the trays to behave like trays in some legacy HP printers.)
Reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period.
Sets the default personality to automatic switching, PCL,
PDF, or PostScript emulation.
Sets whether a warning is cleared on the control panel or when another job is sent.
Determines printer behavior when the system generates an auto-continuable error.
Sets low supplies reporting options.
Sets the COLOR SUPPLY
OUT printer behavior. When a color supply is empty and the printer is set to
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK, the printer will continue printing using black toner only.
Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the hard disk at the printer.
Sets whether the printer will attempt to reprint pages after a jam.
Sets the default language.
I/O menu
Use the I/O menu to configure the printer I/O options.
366
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-45. I/O submenu
Menu item
I/O TIMEOUT
PARALLEL INPUT
EIO x
(Where x=1, 2, or 3.)
Values
5 to 300
HIGH SPEED
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
The following are the possible values:
NOVELL
DCL/LLC
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
APPLETALK
Description
Use this item to select the I/O timeout in seconds.
Use this item to select the speed at which the parallel port communicates with the host, and to enable or disable the bidirectional parallel communication.
Use this item to configure the
EIO devices installed in slot 1,
2, or 3.
Resets menu
Use the Resets menu to reset factory settings, disable and enable PowerSave, and update the printer after new supplies are installed.
Table 7-46. Resets menu
Menu item
RESTORE FACTORY
SETTINGS
POWERSAVE
RESET SUPPLIES
Values
None
ON
OFF
NEW TRANSFER KIT
NEW FUSER KIT
Description
Use this item to clear the page buffer, remove all perishable personality data, reset the printing environment, and return all default settings to factory defaults.
Use this item to enable and disable PowerSave.
Use this item to inform the printer that a new transfer kit or new fuser kit has been installed.
Diagnostics menu
Use the Diagnostics menu to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the printer.
Control-panel troubleshooting
367
Table 7-47. Diagnostics menu
Menu item
PRINT EVENT LOG
SHOW EVENT LOG
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK
Paper Path SENSOR TEST
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
PAPER PATH TEST
SENSOR TEST
MANUAL SENSOR TEST
COMPONENT TEST
PRINT/STOP TEST
COLOR BAND TEST
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Description
Prints an event log that shows the last 50 entries in the printer event log, starting with the most recent.
Shows the last 50 events on the control-panel display, starting with the most recent.
Prints a series of print-quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot any print-quality problems.
Use this item to remove a print cartridge to help determine which cartridge is the source of the problem.
Use this item to perform a test on each of the printer sensors to determine if they are working correctly and displays the status of each sensor.
Use this item to test the paper-handling features of the printer, such as the configuration of the trays.
Use this item to test the paper-path sensors and switches for correct operation.
Use this item to manually test the sensors and switches for correct operation.
Activates individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, and other hardware issues.
Isolates print-quality faults more accurately by stopping the printer in mid print cycle. Stopping the printer in mid-cycle allows you to see where the image begins to degrade.
Use this item to print a color band test page that is used to identify arching in the high-voltage power supply.
Service menu
The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the service menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, you are prompted to type an 8-digit PIN number. The PIN for HP Color LaserJet 4600 models is
04460002. The PIN for HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is 05465004.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight SERVICE.
3. Press to select SERVICE.
4. Press or until the first digit of the PIN appears.
5. Press to save the digit. The control-panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all eight digits have been typed.
368
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
7. Press at any time to move to the previous digit.
Use the Service menu to reset counts, clear the event log, specify the serial number, specify the date the printer was first used, and reset the default paper size.
Table 7-48. Service menu
Menu item
CLEAR EVENT LOG
Values Description
Use this item to clear the printer's internal event log
Total mono pages printed
TOTAL MONO PAGES
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Range: 0 to 9999999
TOTAL COLOR PAGES
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Range: 0 to 9999999
REFURBISH PAGE COUNT
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Range: 0 to 9999999
TOTAL PAGE COUNT
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Range: 0 to 9999999
TRANSFER KIT COUNT
FUSER KIT COUNT
SERIAL NUMBER
SERVICE ID
COLD RESET PAPER
Total color pages printed
Factory service setting.
Range: 0 to 9999999
(120,000 is the maximum number of pages the transfer unit can print)
Range: 0 to 9999999
(150,000 is the maximum number of pages the fuser can print)
A 10-digit number that varies by printer.
YYDD
LETTER
A4
Use this item to reset the page count after replacing the formatter. The page count should reflect the number of pages printed on the print engine rather than the formatter.
Use this item to reset the page count of the current transfer unit if the value is lost. This item automatically resets to zero when the transfer unit is replaced and the user selects to reset the transfer count.
Use this item to reset the page count of the current fuser if the value is lost. This item automatically resets to zero when the fuser is replaced and the user selects the to reset the fuser count.
Use this item to update the serial number if you replace the formatter.
If you replace the formatter, use this item to set the date to the date that the printer was first used, rather than the date that the new formatter was installed.
If the customer uses default paper size of A4 (used in
Europe), use this item to reset the default if you replace the formatter.
Control-panel troubleshooting
369
Tools for troubleshooting
Note
Embedded Web server
When the printer is directly connected to a computer, the embedded Web server is supported for Windows 95 and later. In order to use the embedded Web server with a direct connection, you must select the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver.
Select the option to load Printer Status and Alerts. The proxy server is installed as part of the
Printer Status and Alerts software.
When the printer is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available. You can gain access to the embedded Web server from Windows 95 and later.
Use the embedded Web server to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel. The following are are examples of what you can do when you are using the embedded Web server:
● View printer control-status information
● Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray
● Determine the remaining life of all supplies and order new ones
● View and change tray configurations
● View and change the printer control-panel menu configuration
● View and print internal pages
● Receive notification of printer and supplies events
● View and change the network configuration
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or late or
Netscape Navigator 4 or later. The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based printer connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
To open the embedded Web server
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the printer. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page.)
After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
1. The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer: the Information tab, the Settings tab, and the Network tab. Click the tab that you want to view.
2. See the following sections for more information about each tab.
370
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Information tab
The Information pages group consists of the following screens:
● Device Status. Shows the printer status and the life remaining for HP supplies, with 0% representing that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print media that is set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change Settings.
● Configuration page. Shows the information that is also found on the printer configuration page.
● Supplies Status. Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% representing that a supply is empty. This screen also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window.
To visit any Web site, you must have Internet access.
● Event log. Shows a list of all printer events and errors.
● Usage page. Shows a summary of the number of pages that the printer has printed, grouped by size and type.
● Device Information. Shows the printer network name, address, and model information.
To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.
Settings tab
Use this tab to configure the printer from your computer. The Settings tab can be password protected. If this printer is networked, always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab.
The Settings tab contains the following screens.
● Configure Device. Use this screen to configure all printer. This screen contains the traditional menus that are found on printers that use a control-panel display:
Information, Paper Handling, Configure Device, and Diagnostics.
● Alerts. For networks only. Use this screen to set up e-mail alerts for various printer and supplies events.
● E-mail. For networks only. Use this screen in conjunction with the Alerts screen to set up incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.
● Security. Use this screen to set a password that must be typed in order to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the EWS.
● Other Links. Use this screen to add or customize a link to another Web site. The created link appears in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages. The following permanent links always appear in the Other Links area: HP Instant Support,
Order Supplies, and Product Support.
● Device Information. Use this screen to name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Type the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer.
● Language. Use this screen to specify the language in which the embedded Web server information appears.
Networking tab
The network administrator can use this tab allows to control network-related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer, or if the printer is connected to a network with anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server card.
Tools for troubleshooting
371
Other links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these
Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
● HP Instant Support connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information that is specific to your printer.
● Order Supplies connects to the HP Web site where you can order genuine HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.
● Product Support connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer, where you can search for help regarding general topics.
Printer Status and Alerts software
Printer Status and Alerts is supported only for Windows 95 and later versions.
The Printer Status and Alerts software is available to users of both networked and directly connected printers. To use Printer Status and Alerts software with a directly connected computer, you must select the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver.
Select the option to install Printer Status and Alerts. For network connections, Printer Status and Alerts is installed automatically with the Typical software installation option.
Use this software to view the embedded Web server information for a particular printer. The software also generates messages on the computer that provide the status of the printer and print jobs. Depending on how the printer is connected, you can receive different messages.
● Networked printers. You can receive regular job-status messages that appear every time a print job is sent to the printer or every time the print job finishes printing. You can also receive alerts messages. These messages appear when you are printing to a particular printer if that printer experiences a problem. In some cases, the printer can continue to print (such as when a tray that is not being used is open, or a print cartridge is low). In other cases, a problem might prevent the printer from printing (such as when the media is out, or a print cartridge is empty).
● Directly connected printers. You can receive alerts messages that appear when the printer experiences a problem but can continue printing or a problem that prevents it from printing. You can also receive messages that indicate that the print cartridge is low.
You can set alert options for a single printer that supports Printer Status and Alerts, or you can set alert options for all printers that support Printer Status and Alerts. For networked printers, these alerts only appear for your jobs.
Note that even if you are setting alert options for all printers, not all of the options that you select will apply to all printers. For example, when selecting the option to notify you when the print cartridges are low, directly connected printers that support Printer Status and Alerts will generate a message when the print cartridges are low. However, none of the networked printers will generate this message unless it affects a user-specific job.
372
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
To specify which status messages appear
1. Open Printer Status and Alerts in one of these ways:
● Double-click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon, which is near the clock in the
Tray Manager.
● On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to Printer Status and Alerts, and click
Printer Status and Alerts.
2. Click the Options icon in the left pane.
3. In the For field, select the printer driver for this printer, or select All Printers.
4. Clear the options for the messages that you do not want to appear, and select the options for the messages that you do want to appear.
5. In Status check rate, select how frequently you want the software to update the printer status information that the software uses to generate the messages. Status Check Rate might not be available if the printer administrator has restricted the rights to this function.
To view status messages and information
On the left side of the window, select the printer for which you want to see information. The information that is provided includes status messages, supplies status, and printer capabilities. You can also click the Job History (clock) icon at the top of the window to view a list of previous jobs that were sent to the printer from your computer.
Printing a menu map
Before printing printer information pages, print a menu map. The menu map shows the layout of the printer menus and current printer settings. This can help you restore any user configured-settings after the printer is serviced.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT MENU MAP.
5. Press to select PRINT MENU MAP.
Print the printer configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
Tools for troubleshooting
373
Note
The message PRINTING... CONFIGURATION appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the configuration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page.
If the printer is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect Print Server) or an optional hard-disk drive, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices.
Figure 7-7.
Printer configuration page (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
3
4
5
1
2
6
Printer information
Event log
Installed personalities and options
Memory
Security
Paper trays and options
374
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-8.
HP Color LaserJet 4650 model configuration page
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Printer information
Event log
Installed personalities and options
Calibration information
Color density
Memory
Security
Paper trays and options
Print the supplies status page
The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies:
● Print cartridges (all colors)
● Transfer unit
● Fuser
To print the supplies status page:
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS.
5. Press to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS.
The message PRINTING... SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the supplies status page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting
375
Note
If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page will not show the remaining life for the supplies. The supplies status page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same supplies information as the page shown below.
Figure 7-9.
Supplies status page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 model is shown)
3
4
1
2
5
6
Black print cartridge information
Cyan print cartridge information
Magenta print cartridge information
Yellow print cartridge information
Image transfer kit (ETB) information
Image fuser kit information
Print the usage page
The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer. This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side, the number that were printed on two sides (duplexed), and totals of the two printing methods for each media size. It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT USAGE.
5. Press to select PRINT USAGE.
376
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
The message PRINTING... USAGE appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the usage page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page.
Figure 7-10.
Usage page (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
1
2
3
Printer identification information
Usage totals
Historical printer coverage by color
Figure 7-11.
Usage page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
3
4
1
2
Printer identification information
Usage totals
Print modes and paper path usage
Historical printer coverage by color
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting
377
Print the demo page
The printer can produce a print-quality demonstration page.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT DEMO.
5. Press to select PRINT DEMO.
The message PRINTING... DEMO appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the demo page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page.
Print the file directory page
The file directory page lists the files and directories that are stored in printer memory or on the hard drive (not all printer models come with a hard drive).
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.
5. Press to select PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.
The message PRINTING... FILE DIRECTORY appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the file directory page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the file directory page.
378
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
The file directory page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same file directory page information as the page shown below.
Figure 7-12.
File directory page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown)
Print the PCL font list page
The PCL font list page list the PCL fonts that are available on the printer.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST.
5. Press to select PRINT PCL FONT LIST.
The message PRINTING... PCL FONT LIST appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the PCL fonts list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PCL font list page.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting
379
Note
The PCL font list page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same PCL font list page information as the page shown below.
Figure 7-13.
PCL font list page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown)
Print the PS font list page
The PS font list page list the PS fonts (emulated PostScript) that are available on the printer.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT PS FONT LIST.
5. Press to select PRINT PS FONT LIST.
The message PRINTING... PS FONT LIST appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the PS fonts list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PS font list page.
380
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
The PS font list page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same PS font list page information as the page shown below.
Figure 7-14.
PS font list page
Print the RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
The RGB samples page is used for RGB color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
1. Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
5. Press to select PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
The message PRINTING... RGB SAMPLES appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the RGB samples page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the RGB samples page.
Figure 7-15.
ENWW
RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Tools for troubleshooting
381
Print the CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only)
The CMYK samples page is used for CMYK color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
1. Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.
5. Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.
The message PRINTING... CMYK SAMPLES appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the CMYK samples page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the CMYK samples page.
Figure 7-16.
CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
382
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Diagnostics
LED diagnostics
Use the following procedure to help identify the cause of high-level printer problems. These problems are indicated by abnormalities in the printer's power-on sequence. The LED that the procedure refers to is on the formatter. This is a “heartbeat” LED that blinks on and off when the formatter is operating correctly. Use
Figure 7-17. Formatter LED (HP Color
Figure 7-18. Formatter LED (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
to locate the formatter LED.
1. Does the LED blink with four fast burst at power on? If no, then perform the following checks.
□ Check the firmware.
□ Check the memory.
□ Check the formatter.
2. Does the LED blink at a fast, steady rate during memory testing (one blink per 8 MB)? If no, then perform the following checks.
□ Check the control-panel display for an error code.
□ Check the memory.
□ Check the formatter.
3. Is the LED off for about eight seconds, while the boot code is decompressing, before the display turns on? If no, then perform the following checks.
□ Check the firmware.
□ Check the control-panel display for correct connections and operation.
□ Check the control-panel display for an error code.
ENWW Diagnostics
383
4. Does the LED blink at a steady rate of one blink per second? If no, then perform the following checks.
□ Check the firmware.
□ Check the formatter.
□ Check the control-panel display for an error code.
5. If the control-panel display does not illuminate, perform an engine test to check the engine. You must have paper loaded in tray 2 for the engine test.
Figure 7-17.
Formatter LED (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
384
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-18.
Formatter LED (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Engine diagnostics
This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP
Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer. The printer contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print-quality, paper-path, noise, component, and timing issues.
Diagnostics mode
Some of the diagnostic tests automatically put the printer into a special diagnostics mode.
During the special diagnostics mode the printer can perform actions that would normally cause the printer to enter an error state. Always follow the control-panel directions in the
Diagnostic menu to exit the special diagnostics mode correctly and return the printer to a normal state.
Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode
Four diagnostic tests put the engine into a special state:
● Disable cartridge check
● Sensor test
● Manual sensor test
● Component test
While the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, the following message should appear:
READY DIAGNOSTICS MODE
TO EXIT PRESS CANCEL JOB KEY (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
TO EXIT PRESS STOP KEY (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
ENWW Diagnostics
385
Note
WARNING!
When the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, these four tests appear in the menu and are available to be run. To gain access into other diagnostic tests or to leave the special state, press the Cancel Job (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or Stop (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models) button, and then select Exit. The printer will reset itself, and then return to the normal state.
You need to have a good understanding of how the printer operates in order to use the engine diagnostics successfully. Before proceeding with these diagnostic tests, make sure that you understand the information in chapter 5 of this manual.
Diagnostic tests
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For component or noise isolation, you can run the diagnostic test after removing the covers. Removing the covers provides a better view of the areas that are being tested. To operate the printer with the covers removed, the door switch (SW4, callout 1) lever must be depressed (this is the doorclosed position) and you must depress the ETB connector (callout 2) after closing the ETB.
Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is turned on.
Figure 7-19.
Note
Door switch and ETB connector
Any time a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change. The ETB must be closed and its connector must be depressed before cycling the door switch, or the printer will generate a 59.90 Printer Error. When the covers are installed, the door switch and ETB connector are automatically operated. When the covers are removed, you must perform these steps manually.
Individual diagnostic tests
The following sections explain in more detail how to operate the various diagnostics correctly.
386
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Print the event log page
The event log lists the printer events, including jams, service errors, and other printer conditions.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG.
5. Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG.
The message PRINTING... EVENT LOG appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the event log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.
View the event log on the control-panel display
The show event log lists the last 50 printer events on the control-panel display. (The most recent event is listed first).
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight SHOW EVENT LOG.
5. Press to select SHOW EVENT LOG.
Print the PQ troubleshooting pages
The PQ troubleshooting pages are a series of print-quality assessment pages that you can use to troubleshoot print-quality problems. Follow the instructions on page one of the PQ troubleshooting pages to solve print-quality problems.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
5. Press to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
The message PRINTING... PQ TROUBLESHOOTING appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the PQ troubleshooting pages. The printer returns to the
Ready state after printing the PQ troubleshooting pages.
Diagnostics
387
Note
Disable cartridge check (special mode test)
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when one or more print cartridges are removed or exchanged. Because the cartridges are not keyed, the diagnostic test can be run when one to four cartridges have been removed or moved to another location (exchanged). Consumable supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode. When the printer is in this mode, you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the printer. This diagnostic test can be used to isolate print-quality problems that are related to individual cartridges and to isolate individual cartridge problems, such as noise.
Do not remove or exchange cartridges before you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic. After starting the test, you can remove or exchange cartridges.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK.
5. Press to select DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK.
To exit this diagnostic test, press the Cancel Job button (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Stop (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) and then select Exit diagnostics.
Paper path sensor test (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
This test displays the status of each paper path sensor.
1. Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST.
5. Press to select PAPER PATH TEST.
6. Select the paper path test options when the printer prompts you.
Paper path test
This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams.
To isolate a problem, you can specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature:
● Print test page. Run the paper path test from the default settings: tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to start the test.
● Source. Select tray 1, tray 2, tray 3 (if the single 500-sheet paper feeder or the 2 x 500sheet feeder is installed), or tray 4 ( if the 2 x 500-sheet feeder is installed).
388
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
● Duplex. Enable or disable 2-sided printing.
● Copies. Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST.
5. Press to select PAPER PATH TEST.
6. Select the paper path test options when the printer prompts you.
Sensor Test (special mode test)
Use this diagnostic test to test the printer sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented
by a letter and number on the control-panel display. See Table 7-50. Sensor test letter codes
for a definition of the sensor letter codes. A 1 below the letter indicates that paper is present.
For the paper size sensor, the range of values is from 0 to 7.
Figure 7-20. Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement
indicates the switch state and paper size that are associated with each of these values (the tray 3, or tray 4 paper size switches for the single 500-sheet feeder and the 2 x 500-sheet feeder are similar to the tray 2 switch).
To eliminate the flickering on the control-panel display during this test, you can leave the door switch in the open state.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight SENSOR TEST.
5. Press to select SENSOR TEST.
To exit this diagnostic, press the Cancel Job button (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Stop (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) and then select Exit diagnostics.
Menus cannot be opened during component tests, so serves the same function as the
Cancel Job (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or Stop (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) button.
Figure 7-20.
Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement
Table 7-49. Tray 2 paper size codes
Size code Switch state
SW1 SW2
ENWW
SW3
Paper size
Diagnostics
389
Note
WARNING!
Table 7-49. Tray 2 paper size codes (continued)
Size code
0
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
Switch state
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Paper size
Custom (see note below)
Letter
A5
Legal
B5 (JIS)
Executive
A4 tray not installed
Depressing all three switches of the tray 2 paper size levers causes the Custom paper menu to appear on the control-panel display. Press the button to return to the sensor diagnostic screen.
To toggle a sensor, find and move the sensor flags in the following locations. Table 7-50.
describes how to find the following sensors.
● A. Remove tray 2. The flag is located in the center paper inlet path of the paper pickup unit, directly in front of the right-side white roller. The flag is recessed above the registration shutter in the paper pickup unit.
The fuser might be hot; wait 10 minutes for it to cool down.
● B. Open the ETB and wait for the fuser to cool down. The fuser inlet flag is located at the front center of the fuser. Reach the flag from above the black print cartridge.
● C. The fuser delivery flag is located at the upper center of the fuser, behind the fuser
Caution label. It is wrapped in a clear roller.
● D. The output bin full sensor is located on the upper, rear edge of the fuser.
● E. Remove tray 2. The tray 1 (multipurpose tray) paper-presence sensor flag is the black lever on the front right of the paper tray cavity.
● F. Remove tray 2. The tray 2 paper presence sensor flag is the black lever in the middle center of the paper tray cavity.
● G. Remove tray 2. The tray 2 paper size sensor switches are located on the left, rear side of the paper tray cavity.
● H. The door switch is located on the right, front of the printer frame (underneath the right cover).
Table 7-50. Sensor test letter codes
Letter Sensor Sensor/switch number
A
B
Top of page
Fuser inlet speed
PS 3
PS11
0
1
Idle value
(doors closed, paper in trays 1 and 2)
390
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
E
F
C
D
G
H
Table 7-50. Sensor test letter codes (continued)
Letter Sensor Sensor/switch number
Fuser delivery
Output bin full
PS12
PS13
MP tray paper presence PS2
Tray 2 paper presence PS1
Tray 2 paper size
Door
SW1, SW2, SW3
SW4
0
0
Idle value
(doors closed, paper in trays 1 and 2)
0
0
0 to 7
1
Manual sensor test (special mode test; HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Use this test to test paper-path sensors and the door-open switch manually. The following illustrations and tables show the locations of these sensors.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models ) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST.
5. Press to select MANUAL SENSOR TEST.
Diagnostics
391
6. Open and close doors or move sensor flags to see the sensor status change on the control-panel display.
Figure 7-21.
Location of sensors
Figure 7-22.
Sensors on the the paper pickup unit (the sensors are on the back side of the PCA)
3
4
1
2
Cassette-paper sensor (PS1)
Multipurpose-tray paper sensor (PS2)
Paper leading-edge sensor (PS3)
Overhead transparency sensor (PS4)
392
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-23.
Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor
1
2
3
Fuser inlet paper sensor (PS11)
Fuser delivery sensor (PS12)
Output bin full sensor (PS13)
Table 7-51. Sensors
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
Name
PS1
PS2
PS3
Function
Cassette-paper present sensor
Multipurpose-tray paper present sensor
Paper leading-edge sensor
Overhead transparency sensor
Developing disengagement sensor
Cyan drum home position sensor
Yellow drum home position sensor
Magenta drum home position sensor
Black drum home position sensor
ETB speed sensor
Fuser inlet paper sensor
Fuser delivery sensor
Output bin paper-full sensor
ENWW Diagnostics
393
Figure 7-24.
Note
Sensors (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1
2
3
Feed sensor (SR3)
Upper cassette paper sensor (SR1)
Lower cassette paper sensor (SR2)
Component test (special mode test)
Use the component test to exercise individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If CONTINUOUS is selected as the repeat option, the test will cycle the component on and off. This process continues for 2 minutes, and then the test terminates.
The door interlock switch must be defeated to run any of the component tests. If covers are removed, the door switch must be manually cycled during some tests in order for the engine to recognize a change. The ETB assembly can be open, closed, or removed while some of these tests are executing. Print cartridges can be installed or removed during certain tests.
The control-panel display prompts for removal of some or all cartridges during certain tests in order to rotate and isolate certain components, as well as to protect the cartridges and
ETB.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4. Press to highlight COMPONENT TEST.
5. Press to select COMPONENT TEST.
6. Select the component test options when prompted by the printer.
394
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Menus cannot be opened during component tests, so (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) serves the same function as the Cancel Job (HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models) or Stop (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) button.
The following component tests can be performed:
● Transfer motors. This test turns the components that are involved in the image transfer process: the cartridge motors, the ETB motor and belt (if the ETB is closed and the connector is seated), and the print cartridges (if the ETB is closed). You can remove or install print cartridges during this test.
● Belt only. This test turns only the ETB motor and belt. The ETB must be closed and the connector seated. The control-panel display prompts you to remove the cartridges because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also. Rotating the photosensitive drums could damage the belt or photosensitive drums. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order for the test run.
● Cartridge motors. This test rotates only the print-cartridge drive motors. The controlpanel display prompts you to remove at least one cartridge because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also. The engine rotates the cartridge motor(s) for only the cartridges that are removed. To rotate all motors sequentially, remove all of the cartridges; to isolate one motor, remove only that cartridge. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order to perform the test. Always start this test with all of the cartridges installed, and activate the door switch so that the printer recognizes the configuration. Then you can proceed with the test, by removing one or more cartridges.
● Black, Magenta, Yellow, Cyan laser/scanners. Use the following four tests to rotate each scanner motor individually.
● Fuser motor. Use this test to rotate the fuser motor and drive gears.
Diagnostics
395
● Alienation motor (also called the developing disengaging motor). This test moves the developing disengaging rod, clutches, and plates through their three positions:
● Clean/Home: Middle position; all cartridges disengaged; used during cleaning cycle
● Color: Top position; no cartridges disengaged; used during color printing
● Black: Lowest position; C, M, and Y cartridges disengaged, black engaged; used during black-only printing
● Tray1/tray 2 solenoids. This test activates and releases the tray 1 and tray 2 solenoids.
The tray 1 solenoid is the lower solenoid. The tray 2 solenoid is the upper solenoid. You can remove the two securing screws and rotate the paper pickup unit to get a better view of the solenoids.
Figure 7-25.
Location of solenoids
Table 7-52. Solenoids
Name
SL1
SL2
Function
Cassette pickup solenoid (paper pickup drive assembly)
Multi-purpose tray pickup solenoid (paper pickup drive assembly)
396
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-26.
Solenoids on the paper pickup unit
Figure 7-27.
Solenoids (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1
2
Upper cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)
Lower cassette pickup solenoid (SL2)
ENWW Diagnostics
397
Figure 7-28.
Location of motors and fans
Table 7-53. Motors and fans
M4
M5
M6
M7
Name
M1
M2
M3
M8
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
Function
Cyan drum motor
Yellow drum motor
Magenta drum motor
Black drum motor
Paper pickup motor
ETB motor
Developing disengaging motor
Fuser motor
Formatter fan
Cartridge fan
Power supply fan (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
398
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-29.
Note
Motor (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder motor (M1)
Print/Stop test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the printer-paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 mS. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the printer in one of two ways.
● After the print job is completes press Cancel Job (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Stop (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to return to the Diagnostic menu before the timer times out.
● After the timer times out, press Cancel Job (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or Stop
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models). Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state.
When the timer trips, the control-panel display shows the message Printing stopped Press
to continue. Pressing (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models)will print the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press Cancel Job (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or Stop (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models) first, and then press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models).
Do not attempt to perform a Print/Stop test while the printer is calibrating, because you be required to power-cycle the printer. If a jam message appears on the control-panel display during testing, activate the door switch.
ENWW Diagnostics
399
Information menu
From the Information menu, the following pages can be printed.
Print Menu Map. Use this item to print the control-panel menu map, which shows the layout and current settings of the control-panel menu items.
Print Configuration. Use this item to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories (such as memory DIMMs for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and DDRs for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models), trays, and printer languages.
Print Supplies Status Page. Use this item to print a page that shows the remaining life of the supplies.
Supplies Status. Use this item to view a page that shows the supplies status in a searchable list on the control-panel display.
Print Usage Page. Use this item to print a page that shows a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer and lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports page count.
Print Demo. Use this item to print a demonstration page.
Print RGB Samples. Use this item to print color samples for different RGB values (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models).
Print CMYK Samples. Use this item to print color samples for different CMYK values (HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models).
Print File Directory. Use this item to print a page that shows the name and directory of files that are stored in the printer on an optional hard disk.
Print PCL Font List. Use this item to print a page that shows the available PCL fonts.
Print PS Font List. Use this item to print a page that shows the available PS (emulated
PostScript) fonts.
Configure device menu/printing menu
Print PS Errors. Use this item to print PS error pages.
Print PDF Errors. Use this item to print PDF error pages.
Configure device menu/resets menu
Reset Factory Settings. Use this item to clear the page buffer, remove all perishable personality data, reset the printing environment, and return all default settings to factory defaults.
Powersave. Use this item to reset PowerSave mode to the factory default 30-minute setting.
Reset Supplies. Use this item to inform the printer that a new transfer kit or new fuser kit has been installed. This item also resets the page count of that supply to zero.
Configure device menu/print quality menu
Adjust color. Use this item to modify halftone settings for each color.
Set Registration. Use this item to align simplex and duplex images.
Print Modes. Use this item to associate each media type with a specific print mode.
400
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Optimize. Use this item to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type.
Calibrate Now. For HP Color LaserJet 4600 models, use this item to calibrate the printer for optimum print quality.
Full Calibrate Now. For HP Color LaserJet 4650 models, use this item to calibrate the printer for optimum print quality.
Quick Calibrate Now. For HP Color LaserJet 4650 models, use this item to partially calibrate the printer for optimum print quality.
Color Ret. Use this item to turn on or turn off a color printer Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) setting.
ENWW Diagnostics
401
Test pages
Printing test pages helps you determine whether the printer engine and the formatter are functioning.
Engine test page
To verify that the printer engine is functioning, print an engine test page. Use a small pointed object to depress the test page switch located on the left side of the printer, as shown in
. The test page should have a series of horizontal lines. The test page can use only tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in tray
2.
Figure 7-30.
Test page switch
Formatter test page
To verify that the formatter is functioning, print a configuration page as follows:
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3. Press to select INFORMATION.
4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
402
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Engine resets
Use the following procedures when you perform engine resets.
WARNING!
Cold reset
A cold reset unlocks menus that have been locked and resets control-panel variables.
However, it does not clear the values in the Service menu (such as the serial number and page counts).
Performing a cold reset erases all of the EIO card information.
To perform a cold reset
1. Turn the printer on.
2. As the printer performs its power-on sequence, press and hold (HP Color LaserJet
4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3. When SELECT LANGUAGE appears on the control-panel display, press until COLD
RESET appears on the control-panel display.
4. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models).
The printer performs a cold reset and then continues its power-on sequence.
CAUTION
NVRAM initialization
Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration settings, and the EIO card. Use the Service menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this printer to recognize the printer. Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a cold reset to reset printer variables but still retain the needed values in the Service menu.
Before initializing NVRAM, print a configuration page and a supplies status page to gather the following information:
● Total page count and color page count
● Transfer kit count
● Fuser kit count
● Serial number
To initialize NVRAM
1. Turn the printer on and watch the control-panel display.
2. When the display shows the memory count, press and hold until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3. Press .
4. Press Pause/Resume (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models). The message SKIP DISK LOAD appears on the control-panel display.
ENWW Engine resets
403
5. Press until NVRAM INIT is highlighted.
6. Press The printer initializes NVRAM and then continues its power-on sequence.
Hard disk initialization
A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the printer's hard disk. Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code appears on the control panel indicating an EIO disk error.
Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it.
To initialize the hard disk
1. Turn the printer on.
2. As the printer performs its power-on sequence, press and hold the Pause/Resume (HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) button until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3. Press . The message INITIALIZE DISK appears on the control-panel display.
4. Press The printer initializes the hard disk and continues its power-on sequence.
Calibration bypass
During certain diagnostic procedures, you need to bypass the automatic calibration that is performed whenever the printer is turned on.
To bypass calibration
1. Turn the printer on and watch the control-panel display.
2. When the display shows the memory count, press and hold until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3. Press .
4. Press Pause/Resume (HP Color LaserJet 4600printer) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models).. The message SKIP DISK LOAD appears on the control-panel display.
5. Press until SKIP CALIBRATION is highlighted.
6. Press . The printer skips calibration and then continues its power-on sequence.
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller, the ETB, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner.
1. Press to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight CALIBRATE NOW.
404
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
7. Press to select CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Quick Calibrate Now is used for color tone calibration (D-Max and D-Half) and takes about
68 seconds.
1. Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight QUICK CALIBRATE NOW.
7. Press to select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller, the ETB, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner. Full Calibrate Now includes the Quick Calibrate routines and adds Drum Phase Calibration and Color Plane
Registration. Full Calibrate lasts for about 3 minutes and 15 seconds.
1. Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6. Press to highlight FULL CALIBRATE NOW.
7. Press to select FULL CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Engine resets
405
Service menu
The following sections describe the Service menu.
Using the Service menu
The Service menu is PIN protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, you are prompted to enter your 8-digit PIN number. The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models is 04460002. The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is 05465004.
1. Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2. Press to highlight SERVICE.
3. Press to select SERVICE.
4. Press or until the first digit of the PIN appears.
5. Press to save the digit. The control-panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk.
Press at any time to move to the previous digit.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all eight digits are typed.
Clear event log
Use this item to clear the printer internal event log.
Total page count
The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). If you install a new formatter when repairing a printer, use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value. In this way, the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count for the new formatter. The page count is in two categories: total mono pages and total color pages.
Transfer kit count
Use this item to reset the transfer unit count if the value is lost, such as when you replace the formatter. This value is initially set to zero at the factory. Type a value up to 120,000.
This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets
NEW TRANSFER KIT to YES in the Resets menu.
Fuser kit count
Use this item to reset the fuser count if the value is lost, such as when you replace the formatter. This value is initially set to zero at the factory. Type a value up to 150,000. This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets
NEW FUSER KIT to YES in the Resets menu.
406
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Note
Serial number
If you replace the formatter, use this item to reset the serial number of the printer.
Service ID
Use this item to show the date that the printer was first used on the control panel. This eliminating the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty. Because the printer does not have an internal clock, the service ID date availability is dependent on the printer being connected to a source that can provide the date, such as the installer, the driver, or the embedded Web server. If the printer is not connected to a date source, then the service ID will not be available, and 000000 will appear on the control-panel display.
Restoring the Service ID
If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates:
1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the printer was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12.
2. To calculate DDD, use the following formula: 30 (calendar month - 1) + calendar day =
DDD. If the calendar day is 31, use 30 instead. For instance, if the printer was first used on October 17, calculate DDD as follows:
Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.
Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270.
Add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.
Converting the Service ID to an actual date
You can use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows:
1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.
2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.
Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
2. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Since there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents October.
3. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.
4. The complete date is 17-October-2002.
A 6-day grace period is built into the date system.
ENWW Service menu
407
Cold reset paper
When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4. LETTER and A4 are the only available values.
408
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Diagrams
Main parts
Figure 7-31.
Location of main parts
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
Fuser sleeve
Pressure roller
Transfer charging rollers
ETB belt
Separation pad
Multi-purpose tray pickup roller
Main thermistor
Sub thermistor
Thermoswitch
Cassette pickup rollers
ENWW Diagrams
409
Figure 7-32.
Main parts (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1
2
Upper cassette pickup assembly
Drive assembly
410
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Switches
Figure 7-33.
Location of switches
Table 7-54. Switches
Name
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW1001
Function
Cassette paper-size detection switch
Cassette paper-size detection switch
Cassette paper-size detection switch
Door switch
On/off switch
Test print switch
ENWW Diagrams
411
Figure 7-34.
Switches (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1
2
Upper-cassette paper-size detection switch (SW1)
Lower-cassette paper-size detection switch (SW2)
412
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Sensors
Figure 7-35.
Location of sensors
Figure 7-36.
Sensors on the paper pickup unit (sensors are on the back of the PCA)
3
4
1
2
Cassette paper sensor (PS1)
Multipurpose-tray paper sensor (PS2)
Paper leading-edge sensor (PS3)
Overhead transparency sensor (PS4)
ENWW Diagrams
413
Figure 7-37.
Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor
1
2
3
Fuser inlet paper sensor (PS11)
Fuser delivery sensor (PS12)
Output bin full sensor (PS13)
Table 7-55. Sensors
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
Name
PS1
PS2
PS3
Function
Cassette paper-present sensor
Multipurpose tray paper-present sensor
Paper leading-edge sensor
Overhead transparency sensor
Developing disengagement sensor
Cyan drum home-position sensor
Yellow drum home-position sensor
Magenta drum home-position sensor
Black drum home-position sensor
ETB speed sensor
Fuser inlet paper sensor
Fuser delivery sensor
Output bin paper-full sensor
414
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-38.
Sensors (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1
2
3
Feed sensor (SR3)
Upper cassette paper sensor (SR1)
Lower cassette paper sensor (SR2)
ENWW Diagrams
415
Solenoids
Figure 7-39.
Location of solenoids
Table 7-56. Solenoids
Name
SL1
SL2
Function
Cassette pickup solenoid (paper pickup drive assembly)
Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid (paper pickup drive assembly)
416
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-40.
Solenoids on the paper pickup unit
Figure 7-41.
Solenoids (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1
2
Upper cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)
Lower cassette pickup solenoid (SL2)
ENWW Diagrams
417
Motors and fans
Figure 7-42.
Location of motors and fans
Table 7-57. Motors and fans
M4
M5
M6
M7
Name
M1
M2
M3
M8
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
418
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Function
Cyan drum motor
Yellow drum motor
Magenta drum motor
Black drum motor
Paper pickup motor
ETB motor
Developing disengaging motor
Fuser motor
Formatter fan
Cartridge fan
Power supply fan (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
ENWW
Figure 7-43.
Motor (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder motor (M1)
ENWW Diagrams
419
PCAs
Figure 7-44.
PCA locations
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
Fuser power supply PCA
High-voltage power supply PCA
Toner-level detection PCA
Paper pickup sensor PCA
Low-voltage power supply PCA
Antenna PCAs
Memory controller PCA
DC controller PCA
Formatter PCA
Firmware DIMM PCA (HP CLJ 4600)
Compact FLASH (HP CLJ 4650)
420
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-45.
PCA (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
1 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder PCA
ENWW Diagrams
421
DC controller PCA
Figure 7-46.
Location of DC controller PCA components (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
422
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-47.
Location of DC controller PCA components (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
ENWW Diagrams
423
Connectors
Figure 7-48.
Location of connectors (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
424
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-49.
Location of connectors (1 of 2); HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
ENWW Diagrams
425
Figure 7-50.
Location of connectors (2 of 2); HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
Figure 7-51.
Connectors (500-sheet feeder)
426
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-52.
Connectors (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
ENWW Diagrams
427
General circuit diagram
Figure 7-53.
General circuit diagram (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
428
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-54.
General circuit diagram (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
ENWW Diagrams
429
Figure 7-55.
General circuit diagram (500-sheet feeder)
430
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-56.
General circuit diagram (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
ENWW Diagrams
431
432
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
8
Parts and diagrams
This chapter contains information about the following topics.
ENWW
433
Introduction
CAUTION
Note
The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part.
Be sure to order the correct part. Read the part description carefully. if a part is designated as a field replaceable unit (FRU) for the 4600 Only, it is a replacement part for the HP Color
LaserJet 4600 models only. if a part is designated as a FRU for the 4650 Only, it is a replacement part for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only. If the FRU does not have a printer specific designator, it can be installed on either the HP Color LaserJet 4600 or HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models.
When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model.
In this manual, the abbreviation "PCA" stands for "printed circuit board assembly."
Components described as a PCA may consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.
434
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Ordering parts and supplies
Parts that wear
Web site:
Parts
Order replacement parts from the following Web site:
Customer support
Product documentation and software support can be found at the Web sites listed in
8-1. Technical support Web sites and related documentation .
Table 8-1. Technical support Web sites and related documentation
HP Connect Online
(for HP partners)
HP Customer Care Call Centers
Information about contacting HP call centers in specific countries/regions.
HP Online Technical Support
(for HP partners)
Software drivers, support documentation, and answers to frequently asked questions
HP Technical Training (North America)
Classes and schedules
Go to www.connect-online.hp.com
Go to www.hp.com/support/callcenters
HP Parts
Parts information
Note
Select your country/region in the "select a country or region" field at the top, right corner of the page.
(parts reference guide)
Supplies and accessories
Use the following table to order supplies and accessories for the product.
ENWW Ordering parts and supplies
435
92215S
92215N
Media
C2934A
C2936A
Q6541A
Q6542A
Q1298A
Q1298B
HPU1132
CHP410
Table 8-2. Supplies and accessories
Product number
Accessories
J6057
Part number
J6057-61033
C4103A
C9667A
C9664A
Q3673A
Cables
C2946A
R96-5023-000CN
Q36773-67901
8121-0539
8121-0549
436
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams
Description
HP Jetdirect 620n connectivity card
FIR pod
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models only
Printer cabinet/stand
Optional 500-sheet paper feeder and Tray 3 assembly
4650 Only: Optional 2 x 500sheet paper feeder and Tray
3/4 assembly
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable, 3 meters (approximately
10 feet) long, with 25-pin male/ micro 36-pin male (c-type) connector
Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable
HP LocalTalk cable kit
2-meter USB cable
2-foot USB cable
HP Color LaserJet
Transparencies (letter) 50 sheets
HP Color LaserJet
Transparencies (A4) 50 sheets
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper
(letter) 200 sheets
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper
(A4) 200 sheets
HP LaserJet Tough paper
(letter)
HP LaserJet Tough paper (A4)
HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper (letter)
HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper (A4)
ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-2. Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
HPJ1124
CHP310
Memory
J6073A
C7848A
J6073-69001
C7848-67901
C7850-67901
C7850A
C9653A
C9712A
Q2630A
C9653-67901
C9712-67908
Q2630-67951
Q2631A
Q2635A
Q2631-67951
Q2635-67904
Control-panel overlays (4600 Only) and labels (4650 Only)
C9660-40002
Q3668-67901
C9660-40003
Q3668-67902
C9660-40004
Q3668-67903
C9660-40005
Q3668-67904
C9660-40006
Q3668-67905
C9660-40007
Q3668-67906
C9660-40008
Q3668-67907
C9660-40009
Q3668-67908
C9660-40010
Q3668-67909
Description
HP LaserJet paper (letter)
HP LaserJet paper (A4)
Printer hard disk
4600 Only: 64 MB memory
DIMM (SDRAM)
4600 Only: 128 MB memory
DIMM (SDRAM)
4600 Only: 256 MB memory
DIMM (SDRAM)
4600 Only: Firmware DIMM
4650 Only: 128 MB memory
DDR
4650 Only: 256 MB memory
DDR
4650 Only: Firmware Compact flash
English overlay (4600 Only)
English label (4650 Only)
French overlay (4600 Only)
French label (4650 Only)
German overlay (4600 Only)
German label (4650 Only)
Italian overlay (4600 Only)
Italian label (4650 Only)
Spanish overlay (4600 Only)
Spanish label (4650 Only)
Danish overlay (4600 Only)
Danish label (4650 Only)
Dutch overlay (4600 Only)
Dutch label (4650 Only)
Finnish overlay (4600 Only)
Finnish label (4650 Only)
Norwegian overlay (4600 Only)
Norwegian label (4650 Only)
Ordering parts and supplies
437
438
Table 8-2. Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
C9660-40011
Q3668-67910
C9660-40012
Q3668-67911
C9660-40013
Q3668-67912
C9660-40014
Q3668-67913
C9660-40015
Q3668-67914
C9660-40016
Q3668-679015
C9660-40017
Q3668-67916
C9660-40018
Q3668-67917
C9660-40019
Q3668-67918
C9660-40020
Q3668-67919
C9660-40021
Q3668-67920
C9660-40022
Q3668-67921
C9660-40023
Q3668-67922
C9660-40024
Q3668-67923
C9660-40025
Q3668-67924
Reference materials
5963-7863
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams
Description
Portuguese overlay (4600 Only)
Portuguese label (4650 Only)
Swedish overlay (4600 Only)
Swedish label (4650 Only)
Czech overlay (4600 Only)
Czech label (4650 Only)
Hungarian overlay (4600 Only)
Hungarian label (4650 Only)
Polish overlay (4600 Only)
Polish label (4650 Only)
Russian overlay (4600 Only)
Russian label (4650 Only)
Turkish overlay (4600 Only)
Turkish label (4650 Only)
Arabic overlay (4600 Only)
Arabic label (4650 Only)
Greek overlay (4600 Only)
Greek label (4650 Only)
Hebrew overlay (4600 Only)
Hebrew label (4650 Only)
Japanese overlay (4600 Only)
Japanese label (4650 Only)
Korean overlay (4600 Only)
Korean label (4650 Only)
Thai overlay (4600 Only)
Thai label (4650 Only)
Simplified Chinese overlay
(4600 Only)
Simplified Chinese label (4650
Only)
Traditional Chinese overlay
(4600 Only)
Traditional Chinese label (4650
Only)
HP LaserJet Printer Family
Paper Specifications Guide
ENWW
Note
Table 8-2. Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
5021-0330
Q3668-90901
Description
PCL/PJL Technical Reference
Package
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer service manual (this service manual is for the HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models
and the HP Color LaserJet
4650 models )
Supplies
C9720A
C9721A
C9722A
C9723A
C9724A
Q3675A
C9725A
Q3676A
C9726A
Q3677A
C9720-67901
C9720-67902
C9721-67901
C9721-67902
C9722-67901
C9722-67902
C9723-67901
C9723-67902
RG5-6484-040CN (new)
RG5-7455-000CN (new)
C9660-69016 (exchange)
RG5-6493-110CN (new)
RG5-7450-000CN (new)
C9660-69017 (exchange)
RG5-6517-110CN (new)
RG5-7451-000CN (new)
Black print cartridge
Black print cartridge (Europe)
Cyan print cartridge
Cyan print cartridge (Europe)
Yellow print cartridge
Yellow print cartridge (Europe)
Magenta print cartridge
Magenta print cartridge (Europe)
Image transfer kit; 4600 Only
Image transfer kit; 4650 Only
Image fuser kit (110 volt); 4600
Only
Image fuser kit (110 volt); 4650
Only
Image fuser kit (220 volt); 4600
Only
Image fuser kit (220 volt); 4650
Only
Formatter simplex; 4600 Only C9660A
Q3999A
C9661A
C9660-69011 (exchange)
C9660-67911 (new)
Q3999-69001 (exchange)
Q3999-67091 (new)
C9661-69002 (exchange)
C9661-67902 (new)
Formatter simplex; 4650 Only
Formatter duplex; 4600 Only
The only difference between the print cartridges listed above is that the Europe-only print cartridges have different languages on the instruction sheet inside the box.
ENWW Ordering parts and supplies
439
Common fasteners
Table 8-3. Common fasteners
Illustration Description
Screw, machine with washer
Size
M3x8
Screw, self tapping
Screw, truss head M3x6
Retaining Ring (etype)
Part number Uses
xA9-1276-000CN To hold plastic to metal, (example: the skins)
To hold plastic to plastic xA9-1275-000CN Sheet metal to sheet metal,
(example: formatter pan)
To hold gears into place
440
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW Ordering parts and supplies
441
Illustrations and parts lists
The following illustrations and parts tables list the field replaceable units (FRU) for the HP
Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers. At the end of this chapter are an alphabetical and numerical master parts list.
Figure 8-1.
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer major components
442
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
Fuser assembly
ETB assembly
Paper pickup assembly
Cassette
Paper pickup drive assembly
Disengaging drive assembly
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Fuser drive assembly
ENWW Illustrations and parts lists
443
Figure 8-2.
Printer PCAs
444
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-4. Printer PCAs
9
9
9
9
8
8
6
7
9
9
10
10
5
5
3
4
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Fuser power supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power supply PCA 220 V
High-voltage power supply PCA
Toner sensor PCA
Paper pickup PCA
Low-voltage power supply 110 V
Low-voltage power supply 220 V
Memory tag antenna PCA
Memory controller PCA
DC controller PCA, 4600 Only
DC controller PCA, 4650 Only
Formatter, simplex exchange 4600 Only
Formatter, exchange 4650 Only
Formatter, simplex new 4600 Only
Formatter, new 4650 Only
Formatter, duplex exchange 4600 Only
Formatter, duplex new 4600 Only
Firmware DIMM 4600 Only
Compact flash 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-6391-100CN
RG5-7470-000CN
C9660-69011
Q3999-69001
C9660-67901
Q3999-67901
C9661-69002
C9661-67902
C9712-67911
Q2635-67904
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
Illustrations and parts lists
445
External covers and panels
Figure 8-3.
External covers and panels
446
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-5. External covers and panels
6
7
4
5
8
9
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Fuser right cover
Front upper cover assembly
Multi-purpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Front lower cover assembly
Left cover
Rear cover assembly
Top cover assembly
Filter, rear
Filter, left side
Part number
RB2-8591-000CN
RG5-6465-000CN
RG5-6467-000CN
RG5-6466-000CN
RB2-8590-000CN
RG5-7494-000CN
RG5-6464-000CN
RB2-8596-000CN
RB3-0607-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW External covers and panels
447
Internal components
Figure 8-4.
Internal components (1 of 5)
448
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
Table 8-6. Internal components (1 of 5)
4
5
2
3
1
1
Ref
1
Description
Control panel assembly 4650 Only
Control panel assembly (110 V) 4600 Only
Control panel assembly (220 V) 4600 Only
Part number
RG5-7489-000CN
RG5-6432-017CN
RG5-6433-017CN
Control panel cross member assembly
Contact pin assembly
RG5-6510-000CN
RG5-6492-000CN
Drum ground assembly (black and yellow) short RG5-6474-000CN
Drum grounding assembly (cyan and magenta) long
RG5-7362-000CN
Plate, drive interlock
Drum drive assembly (cyan and magenta)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Gear 200T (cyan and magenta)
Gear 200T (black and yellow)
Spring tension
Plate, drive grounding
RB2-8225-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RS7-0137-000CN
RS7-0138-000CN
RS6-2537-000CN
RB2-8255-000CN
Plate, developer disengagement (change plate) RB2-8239-030CN
Gear 17T RS7-0139-000CN
Cable, antenna
Antenna memory PCA assembly
RG5-6418-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
Cable, memory; 4600 Only
Arm, test print
RG5-6420-000CN
RB2-8250-000CN
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
Internal components
449
Figure 8-5.
Internal components (2 of 5)
450
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-7. Internal components (2 of 5)
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
7
4
5
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Lever, cartridge pressure
Cover, cartridge 4650 Only
Cassette frame right assembly
Rod, spring
Cassette frame left assembly
Rod, spring
Cable/connector, optional feeder
Switch, cassette paper size
Cable, cassette size (optional)
Cable, environment sensor 4650 Only
Environment/humidity sensor 4650 Only
Switch, push
Cable, cassette size
Part number
RB2-8195-000CN
RB2-8196-000CN
RG5-6460-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RG5-6459-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-7471-000CN
WP2-5138-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
RG5-6431-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Qty
4
ENWW Internal components
451
Figure 8-6.
Internal components (3 of 5)
452
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-8. Internal components (3 of 5)
11
12
13
14
8
9
10
10
6
7
4
5
2
3
Ref
1
Description
High-voltage power supply PCA assembly
HVT terminal assembly
Microswitch, front cover
Toner sensor PCA
Spring, tension
Arm, pressure
Connector, drawer
Cartridge, inlet assembly
Cable, left plate
DC controller PCA assembly 4600 Only
DC controller PCA assembly 4650 Only
Fan, Cartridge
Fan, formatter
ETB latch assembly
Fan, lower (power supply fan) 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6449-020CN
WC4-5169-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RB2-8151-020CN
WS3-5746-000CN
RG5-6450-000CN
RG5-6413-000CN
RG5-6391-100CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RH7-1490-000CN
RH7-1491-000CN
RG5-6456-000CN
RH7-1607-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components
453
Figure 8-7.
Internal components (4 of 5)
454
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
7
8
9
10
5
6
4
5
11
11
12
12
3
4
1
2
1
1
Ref
1
Table 8-9. Internal components (4 of 5)
Description
Fuser 110 V 4600 Only
Fuser 110 V 4650 Only
Fuser 220 V 4600 Only
Fuser 220 V 4650 Only
Static eliminator 4600 Only
Color registration detection assembly
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
ETB assembly 4600 Only
ETB assembly 4650 Only
Cap, right
Spring, tension
Cap, left
Developing disengaging drive assembly
Damper assembly (top cover hinge)
Fuser drive assembly 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only
Laser/scanner assembly 4600 Only
Laser/scanner assembly 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-6493-110CN
RG5-7450-000CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-7451-000CN
RF5-3773-020CN
RG5-6454-000CN
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-7453-000CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RB2-8124-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RB2-8121-000CN
RG5-6507-020CN
RG5-6446-000CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-6390-000CN
RG5-7475-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
Internal components
455
Figure 8-8.
Internal components (5 of 5)
456
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-10. Internal components (5 of 5)
19
20
20
21
22
23
17
18
18
19
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
6
6
5
5
4
4
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Cable, interface
Cable, flat
Spring, scanner support
Cable, AC 110 V
Cable, AC 220 V
Fuser power supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power supply PCA 220 V
Cable/connector, fuser 4600 Only
Cable/connector, fuser 4650 Only
Cable, relay
Gear 29T
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Gear, pressure
Cam/gear 66T
Spring, tension
Memory tag antenna PCA assembly
Sensor bracket assembly
Cable, sensor
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Cable, DC power supply
Low-voltage power supply assembly 110 V
Low-voltage power supply assembly 220 V
Fuse, 125 V, 6.3 Amp, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 4 Amp, 220 V
Fuse, 250 V, 20 Amp, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 8 Amp, 220 V
Bracket, sensor
Cover, sensor
Plate, grounding
RG5-5469-000CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RG5-6423-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RG5-6415-000CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
VD7-2356-301CN
VD7-0644-001CN
VD7-1732-002CN
VD7-1838-001CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RB2-8541-000CN
RB2-8542-000CN
Part number
RG5-6422-000CN
RH2-5471-000CN
RB2-8246-000CN
RG5-6427-000CN
RG5-6434-000CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RG5-6425-000CN
RG5-7480-000CN
RG5-6414-000CN
RS7-0136-020CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RB2-8122-020CN
RS7-0135-000CN
RS6-2510-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
Qty
1
Internal components
457
Figure 8-9.
Paper pickup-drive assembly
458
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-11. Paper pickup-drive assembly
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Solenoid
Part number
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RH7-5319-000CN
1
2
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components
459
Figure 8-10.
Drum drive assembly
460
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-12. Drum drive assembly
1
1
Ref
1
2
Description
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
LED PCA assembly
Part number
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-6394-000CN
1
1
Qty
2
1
ENWW Internal components
461
Figure 8-11.
Disengaging drive assembly
462
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-13. Disengaging drive assembly
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Disengaging drive assembly
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Motor, M7, developing disengaging stepping
Part number
RG5-6507-020CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RH7-1494-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components
463
Figure 8-12.
Fuser drive assembly
464
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-14. Fuser drive assembly
1
2
Ref
1
3
3
Description
Fuser drive assembly 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4600
Only
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4650
Only
Part number
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RH5-1495-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
1
ENWW Internal components
465
Figure 8-13.
Cassette (tray 2)
466
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-15. Cassette (tray 2)
3
4
5
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Cassette (tray 2) 4600 Only
Cassette (tray 2) 4650 Only
Separation pad
Plate, separation assembly
Arm, paper size
Multi-purpose tray pickup roller assembly
Part number
RG5-6476-090CN
RG5-7459-000CN
RF5-3750-020CN
RF5-3749-000CN
RB2-8349-000CN
RG9-1529-000CN
1
3
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components
467
Figure 8-14.
Paper pickup assembly
468
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-16. Paper pickup assembly
4
5
3
4
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Roller, paper pickup
Paper sensor PCA assembly
Paper pickup drive assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly 4650 Only
Cable, paper feed
Part number
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-7453-040CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-6419-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
2
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components
469
Figure 8-15.
ETB assembly
470
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-17. ETB assembly
3
4
1
2
Ref
1
Description
ETB assembly 4600 Only
ETB assembly 4650 Only
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V
Roller, oblique
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Part number
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RB1-2155-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
2
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components
471
Figure 8-16.
Fuser assembly
472
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
1
1
2
3
4
Table 8-18. Fuser assembly
Ref
1
Description
Fuser assembly 110 V
1 Fuser assembly 110 V
Fuser assembly 220 V
Fuser assembly 220 V
Sensor flag
Fuser cover, left
Fuser cover, right
Part number
RG5-6439-110CN 4600
Only
RG5-7450-000CN 4650
Only
RG5-6517-110CN 4600
Only
RG5-7451-000CN 4650
Only
RB2-8498-030CN
RF5-3774-030CN
RF5-3775-030CN
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
1
ENWW Internal components
473
500-sheet paper feeder
Figure 8-17.
500-sheet paper feeder assembly
474
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-19. 500-sheet paper feeder assembly
Ref
1
2
Description
500-sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly
Cassette, 500-sheet paper feeder
Part number
Q3673-67901
RG1-4140-040CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder
475
Figure 8-18.
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
476
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-20. 500-sheet paper feeder internal components
3
3
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Paper feeder PCA assembly 4600 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly 4650 Only
Roller, paper pickup
Paper feeder drive assembly 4600 Only
Paper feeder drive assembly 4650 Only
Part number
RG1-4139-000CN
RG1-7542-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RG1-4138-020CN
RG5-7541-000CN
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder
477
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
Figure 8-19.
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
478
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-21. 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
2
3
Ref
1
4
Description Part number
2 x 500-sheet feeder/tray assembly 4650 Only Q3674-67901
2 x 500 upper cassette 4650 Only
2 x 500 lower cassette 4650 Only
2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly
4650 Only
RG5-7535-000CN
RG5-7534-000CN
RG5-7518-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
479
Figure 8-20.
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2)
480
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-22. 2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2)
Ref
1
2
Description
Fixed level left plate (secures the printer to the feeder) 4650 Only
Fixed level right plate (secures the printer to the feeder) 4650 Only
Part number
RB3-0978-000CN
RB3-0979-000CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
481
Figure 8-21.
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
482
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-23. 2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Paper pickup rollers 4650 Only
Adjuster cover 4650 Only
Outrigger assembly 4650 Only
Part number
RF5-3739-000CN
RB2-3691-000CN
RG5-7523-000CN
6
6
Qty
2
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
483
Figure 8-22.
2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly
484
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-24. 2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly
Ref
1
Description
2 x 500 paper pickup feeder drive assembly
(4650 Only)
Part number
RG5-7531-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
485
Figure 8-23.
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly
486
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-25. 2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly
Ref
1
Description
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-7529-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
487
Figure 8-24.
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly
488
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-26. 2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly
Ref
1
Description
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-7530-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
489
Alphabetical parts list
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list
Description
2 x 500 lower cassette 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-7534-000CN
2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly 4650 Only RG5-7518-000CN
2 x 500 paper pickup feeder drive assembly (4650
Only)
2 x 500 upper cassette 4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly
4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly
4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder/tray assembly 4650 Only
500-sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly
Adjuster cover 4650 Only
Antenna memory PCA assembly
Arm, paper size
Arm, pressure
Arm, test print
Bracket, sensor
Cable, AC 110 V
Cable, AC 220 V
Cable, antenna
Cable, cassette size
Cable, cassette size (optional)
Cable, DC power supply
Cable, environment sensor 4650 Only
RG5-7531-000CN
RG5-7535-000CN
RG5-7530-000CN
RG5-7529-000CN
Q3674-67901
Q3673-67901
RB2-3691-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RB2-8349-000CN
RB2-8151-020CN
RB2-8250-000CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RG5-6427-000CN
RG5-6434-000CN
RG5-6418-000CN
RG5-6431-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-6415-000CN
RG5-7471-000CN
Table and page
Table 8-21 on page
479
Table 8-21 on page
479
Table 8-24 on page
485
Table 8-21 on page
479
Table 8-26 on page
489
Table 8-25 on page
487
Table 8-21 on page
479
Table 8-19 on page
475
Table 8-23 on page
483
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-15 on page
467
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-7 on page 451
490
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Cable, flat
Cable, interface
Cable, left plate
Cable, memory; 4600 Only
Cable, paper feed
Cable, relay
Cable, sensor
Cable/connector, fuser 4600 Only
Cable/connector, fuser 4650 Only
Cable/connector, optional feeder
Cam/gear 66T
Cap, left
Cap, right
Cartridge, inlet assembly
Cassette (tray 2) 4600 Only
Cassette (tray 2) 4650 Only
Cassette frame left assembly
Cassette frame right assembly
Cassette, 500-sheet paper feeder
Color registration detection assembly
Compact flash 4650 Only
Connector, drawer
Contact pin assembly
Control panel assembly (110 V) 4600 Only
Control panel assembly (220 V) 4600 Only
Control panel assembly 4650 Only
Control panel cross member assembly
Part number
RH2-5471-000CN
RG5-6422-000CN
RG5-6413-000CN
RG5-6420-000CN
RG5-6419-000CN
RG5-6414-000CN
RG5-6423-000CN
RG5-6425-000CN
RG5-7480-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RS7-0135-000CN
RB2-8121-000CN
RB2-8124-000CN
RG5-6450-000CN
RG5-6476-090CN
RG5-7459-000CN
RG5-6459-000CN
RG5-6460-000CN
RG1-4140-040CN
RG5-6454-000CN
Q2635-67904
WS3-5746-000CN
RG5-6492-000CN
RG5-6432-017CN
RG5-6433-017CN
RG5-7489-000CN
RG5-6510-000CN
Table and page
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-16 on page
469
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-15 on page
467
Table 8-15 on page
467
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-19 on page
475
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Alphabetical parts list
491
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Cover, cartridge 4650 Only
Cover, sensor
Damper assembly (top cover hinge)
DC controller PCA assembly 4600 Only
DC controller PCA assembly 4650 Only
DC controller PCA, 4600 Only
DC controller PCA, 4650 Only
Developing disengaging drive assembly
Disengaging drive assembly
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (cyan and magenta)
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
ETB assembly 4600 Only
ETB assembly 4650 Only
ETB assembly 4650 Only
ETB latch assembly
Fan, Cartridge
Fan, formatter
Fan, lower (power supply fan) 4650 Only
Filter, left side
Filter, rear
Firmware DIMM 4600 Only
Part number
RB2-8196-000CN
RB2-8541-000CN
RG5-6446-000CN
RG5-6391-100CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RG5-6391-100CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RG5-6507-020CN
RG5-6507-020CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
Drum ground assembly (black and yellow) short RG5-6474-000CN
Drum grounding assembly (cyan and magenta) long RG5-7362-000CN
Environment/humidity sensor 4650 Only
ETB assembly 4600 Only
WP2-5138-000CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-6456-000CN
RH7-1490-000CN
RH7-1491-000CN
RH7-1607-000CN
RB3-0607-000CN
RB2-8596-000CN
C9712-67911
Table and page
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-13 on page
463
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-12 on page
461
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-12 on page
461
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-12 on page
461
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-17 on page
471
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-17 on page
471
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-4 on page 445
492
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number
RB3-0978-000CN Fixed level left plate (secures the printer to the feeder) 4650 Only
Fixed level right plate (secures the printer to the feeder) 4650 Only
Formatter, duplex exchange 4600 Only
Formatter, duplex new 4600 Only
Formatter, exchange 4650 Only
Formatter, new 4650 Only
Formatter, simplex exchange 4600 Only
Formatter, simplex new 4600 Only
Front lower cover assembly
Front upper cover assembly
Fuse, 125 V, 6.3 Amp, 110 V
RB3-0979-000CN
C9661-69002
C9661-67902
Q3999-69001
Q3999-67901
C9660-69011
C9660-67901
RG5-6466-000CN
RG5-6465-000CN
VD7-2356-301CN
Fuse, 250 V, 20 Amp, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 4 Amp, 220 V
Fuse, 250 V, 8 Amp, 220 V
Fuser 110 V 4600 Only
Fuser 110 V 4650 Only
Fuser 220 V 4600 Only
Fuser 220 V 4650 Only
Fuser assembly 110 V
Fuser assembly 110 V
Fuser assembly 220 V
Fuser assembly 220 V
Fuser cover, left
Fuser cover, right
Fuser drive assembly 4600 Only
VD7-1732-002CN
VD7-0644-001CN
VD7-1838-001CN
RG5-6493-110CN
RG5-7450-000CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-7451-000CN
RG5-6439-110CN
4600 Only
RG5-7450-000CN
4650 Only
RG5-6517-110CN
4600 Only
RG5-7451-000CN
4650 Only
RF5-3774-030CN
RF5-3775-030CN
RG5-6512-000CN
Table and page
Table 8-22 on page
481
Table 8-22 on page
481
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-18 on page
473
Table 8-18 on page
473
Table 8-18 on page
473
Table 8-18 on page
473
Table 8-18 on page
473
Table 8-18 on page
473
Table 8-14 on page
465
Alphabetical parts list
493
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Fuser drive assembly 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only
Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only
Fuser power supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power supply PCA 220 V
Fuser power supply PCA 220 V
Fuser right cover
Gear 17T
Gear 200T (black and yellow)
Gear 200T (cyan and magenta)
Gear 29T
Gear, pressure
High-voltage power supply PCA
High-voltage power supply PCA assembly
HVT terminal assembly
Laser/scanner assembly 4600 Only
Laser/scanner assembly 4650 Only
LED PCA assembly
Left cover
Lever, cartridge pressure
Low-voltage power supply 110 V
Low-voltage power supply 220 V
Low-voltage power supply assembly 110 V
Low-voltage power supply assembly 220 V
Memory controller PCA
Memory tag antenna PCA
Memory tag antenna PCA assembly
Part number
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RB2-8591-000CN
RS7-0139-000CN
RS7-0138-000CN
RS7-0137-000CN
RS7-0136-020CN
RB2-8122-020CN
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6449-020CN
RG5-6390-000CN
RG5-7475-000CN
RG5-6394-000CN
RB2-8590-000CN
RB2-8195-000CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
Table and page
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-14 on page
465
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-12 on page
461
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page
457
494
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description Part number
Microswitch, front cover
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V
WC4-5169-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
Motor, M7, developing disengaging stepping
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4650 Only
Multi-purpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Multi-purpose tray pickup roller assembly
Outrigger assembly 4650 Only
Paper feeder drive assembly 4600 Only
Paper feeder drive assembly 4650 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly 4600 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly 4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly 4650 Only
Paper pickup PCA
Paper pickup rollers 4650 Only
Paper sensor PCA assembly
RH7-1494-000CN
RH5-1495-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RG5-6467-000CN
RG9-1529-000CN
RG5-7523-000CN
RG1-4138-020CN
RG5-7541-000CN
RG1-4139-000CN
RG1-7542-000CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-7453-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-7453-040CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
Table and page
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-17 on page
471
Table 8-13 on page
463
Table 8-14 on page
465
Table 8-14 on page
465
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-15 on page
467
Table 8-23 on page
483
Table 8-20 on page
477
Table 8-20 on page
477
Table 8-20 on page
477
Table 8-20 on page
477
Table 8-11 on page
459
Table 8-16 on page
469
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-11 on page
459
Table 8-16 on page
469
Table 8-16 on page
469
Table 8-16 on page
469
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-23 on page
483
Table 8-16 on page
469
Alphabetical parts list
495
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Plate, developer disengagement (change plate)
Plate, drive grounding
Plate, drive interlock
Plate, grounding
Plate, separation assembly
Rear cover assembly
Rod, spring
Rod, spring
Roller, oblique
Roller, paper pickup
Roller, paper pickup
Sensor bracket assembly
Sensor flag
Separation pad
Solenoid
Spring tension
Spring, scanner support
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Part number
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RB2-8239-030CN
RB2-8255-000CN
RB2-8225-000CN
RB2-8542-000CN
RF5-3749-000CN
RG5-7494-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB1-2155-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RB2-8498-030CN
RF5-3750-020CN
RH7-5319-000CN
RS6-2537-000CN
RB2-8246-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
Table and page
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-13 on page
463
Table 8-14 on page
465
Table 8-17 on page
471
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-15 on page
467
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-17 on page
471
Table 8-16 on page
469
Table 8-20 on page
477
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-18 on page
473
Table 8-15 on page
467
Table 8-11 on page
459
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-9 on page 455
496
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-27. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Spring, tension
Static eliminator 4600 Only
Switch, cassette paper size
Switch, push
Toner sensor PCA
Toner sensor PCA
Top cover assembly
Part number
RS6-2510-000CN
RF5-3773-020CN
WC2-5452-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6464-000CN
Table and page
Table 8-10 on page
457
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-5 on page 447
ENWW Alphabetical parts list
497
Numerical parts list
Table 8-28. Numerical parts list
RB2-8151-020CN
RB2-8195-000CN
RB2-8196-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB2-8225-000CN
RB2-8239-030CN
RB2-8246-000CN
RB2-8250-000CN
RB2-8255-000CN
RB2-8349-000CN
RB2-8498-030CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RB2-8541-000CN
Part number
C9660-67901
C9660-69011
C9661-67902
C9661-69002
C9712-67911
Q2635-67904
Q3673-67901
Q3674-67901
Q3999-67901
Q3999-69001
RB1-2155-000CN
RB2-3691-000CN
RB2-8121-000CN
RB2-8122-020CN
RB2-8124-000CN
Description
Formatter, simplex new 4600 Only
Formatter, simplex exchange 4600 Only
Formatter, duplex new 4600 Only
Formatter, duplex exchange 4600 Only
Firmware DIMM 4600 Only
Compact flash 4650 Only
500-sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly
2 x 500-sheet feeder/tray assembly 4650 Only
Formatter, new 4650 Only
Formatter, exchange 4650 Only
Roller, oblique
Adjuster cover 4650 Only
Cap, left
Gear, pressure
Cap, right
Arm, pressure
Lever, cartridge pressure
Cover, cartridge 4650 Only
Rod, spring
Rod, spring
Plate, drive interlock
Plate, developer disengagement (change plate)
Spring, scanner support
Arm, test print
Plate, drive grounding
Arm, paper size
Sensor flag
Sensor bracket assembly
Bracket, sensor
Cover, sensor
Table and page
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-19 on page 475
Table 8-21 on page 479
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-17 on page 471
Table 8-23 on page 483
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-15 on page 467
Table 8-18 on page 473
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
498
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3749-000CN
RF5-3750-020CN
RF5-3773-020CN
RF5-3774-030CN
RF5-3775-030CN
RG1-4138-020CN
RG1-4139-000CN
RG1-4140-040CN
RG1-7542-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-6390-000CN
RG5-6391-100CN
RG5-6391-100CN
Table 8-28. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RB2-8542-000CN
RB2-8590-000CN
RB2-8591-000CN
RB2-8596-000CN
RB3-0607-000CN
RB3-0978-000CN
RB3-0979-000CN
Plate, grounding
Left cover
Fuser right cover
Filter, rear
Filter, left side
Fixed level left plate (secures the printer to the feeder) 4650 Only
Fixed level right plate (secures the printer to the feeder) 4650 Only
Roller, paper pickup
Roller, paper pickup
Paper pickup rollers 4650 Only
Plate, separation assembly
Separation pad
Static eliminator 4600 Only
Fuser cover, left
Fuser cover, right
Paper feeder drive assembly 4600 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly 4600 Only
Cassette, 500-sheet paper feeder
Paper feeder PCA assembly 4650 Only
Memory tag antenna PCA
Memory tag antenna PCA assembly
Laser/scanner assembly 4600 Only
DC controller PCA, 4600 Only
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6394-000CN
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6395-000CN
DC controller PCA assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup PCA
Paper sensor PCA assembly
Toner sensor PCA
Toner sensor PCA
LED PCA assembly
High-voltage power supply PCA
High-voltage power supply PCA assembly
Table and page
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-22 on page 481
Table 8-22 on page 481
Table 8-16 on page 469
Table 8-20 on page 477
Table 8-23 on page 483
Table 8-15 on page 467
Table 8-15 on page 467
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-18 on page 473
Table 8-18 on page 473
Table 8-20 on page 477
Table 8-20 on page 477
Table 8-19 on page 475
Table 8-20 on page 477
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-16 on page 469
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-12 on page 461
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-8 on page 453
Numerical parts list
499
RG5-6422-000CN
RG5-6423-000CN
RG5-6425-000CN
RG5-6427-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-6431-000CN
RG5-6432-017CN
RG5-6433-017CN
RG5-6434-000CN
RG5-6439-110CN
4600 Only
RG5-6446-000CN
RG5-6449-020CN
RG5-6450-000CN
RG5-6454-000CN
RG5-6456-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6413-000CN
RG5-6414-000CN
RG5-6415-000CN
RG5-6418-000CN
RG5-6419-000CN
RG5-6420-000CN
Table 8-28. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
Memory controller PCA
Antenna memory PCA assembly
Fuser power supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power supply PCA 220 V
Fuser power supply PCA 220 V
Low-voltage power supply 110 V
Low-voltage power supply assembly 110 V
Low-voltage power supply 220 V
Low-voltage power supply assembly 220 V
Cable, left plate
Cable, relay
Cable, DC power supply
Cable, antenna
Cable, paper feed
Cable, memory; 4600 Only
Cable, interface
Cable, sensor
Cable/connector, fuser 4600 Only
Cable, AC 110 V
Cable/connector, optional feeder
Cable, cassette size (optional)
Cable, cassette size
Control panel assembly (110 V) 4600 Only
Control panel assembly (220 V) 4600 Only
Cable, AC 220 V
Fuser assembly 110 V
Damper assembly (top cover hinge)
HVT terminal assembly
Cartridge, inlet assembly
Color registration detection assembly
ETB latch assembly
500
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-16 on page 469
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-18 on page 473
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-8 on page 453
ENWW
ENWW
RG5-6507-020CN
RG5-6507-020CN
RG5-6510-000CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-6517-110CN
4600 Only
RG5-7362-000CN
RG5-7450-000CN
RG5-7450-000CN
4650 Only
RG5-7451-000CN
RG5-7451-000CN
4650 Only
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-7453-000CN
RG5-6459-000CN
RG5-6460-000CN
RG5-6464-000CN
RG5-6465-000CN
RG5-6466-000CN
RG5-6467-000CN
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-6474-000CN
RG5-6476-090CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-6492-000CN
RG5-6493-110CN
Table 8-28. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
Cassette frame left assembly
Cassette frame right assembly
Top cover assembly
Front upper cover assembly
Front lower cover assembly
Multi-purpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4600 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly 4600 Only
Drum ground assembly (black and yellow) short
Cassette (tray 2) 4600 Only
ETB assembly 4600 Only
ETB assembly 4600 Only
Contact pin assembly
Fuser 110 V 4600 Only
Developing disengaging drive assembly
Disengaging drive assembly
Control panel cross member assembly
Fuser drive assembly 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly 4600 Only
Fuser 220 V 4600 Only
Fuser assembly 220 V
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-13 on page 463
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-14 on page 465
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-18 on page 473
Drum grounding assembly (cyan and magenta) long Table 8-6 on page 449
Fuser 110 V 4650 Only Table 8-9 on page 455
Fuser assembly 110 V Table 8-18 on page 473
Fuser 220 V 4650 Only
Fuser assembly 220 V
Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only
Fuser drive assembly 4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-18 on page 473
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-14 on page 465
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table and page
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-16 on page 469
Table 8-11 on page 459
Table 8-16 on page 469
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-15 on page 467
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-17 on page 471
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-9 on page 455
Numerical parts list
501
Table 8-28. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RG5-7453-040CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-7459-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RG5-7471-000CN
RG5-7475-000CN
RG5-7480-000CN
RG5-7489-000CN
RG5-7494-000CN
RG5-7518-000CN
RG5-7523-000CN
RG5-7529-000CN
RG5-7530-000CN
RG5-7531-000CN
RG5-7534-000CN
RG5-7535-000CN
RG5-7541-000CN
RG9-1529-000CN
RH2-5471-000CN
RH5-1495-000CN
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
ETB assembly 4650 Only
ETB assembly 4650 Only
Cassette (tray 2) 4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly 4650 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly 4650 Only
Drum drive assembly (cyan and magenta)
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
DC controller PCA, 4650 Only
DC controller PCA assembly 4650 Only
Cable, environment sensor 4650 Only
Laser/scanner assembly 4650 Only
Cable/connector, fuser 4650 Only
Control panel assembly 4650 Only
Rear cover assembly
2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly 4650
Only
Outrigger assembly 4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly
4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly
4650 Only
2 x 500 paper pickup feeder drive assembly (4650
Only)
2 x 500 lower cassette 4650 Only
2 x 500 upper cassette 4650 Only
Paper feeder drive assembly 4650 Only
Multi-purpose tray pickup roller assembly
Cable, flat
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Table and page
Table 8-16 on page 469
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-17 on page 471
Table 8-15 on page 467
Table 8-11 on page 459
Table 8-16 on page 469
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-12 on page 461
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-12 on page 461
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-12 on page 461
Table 8-4 on page 445
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-5 on page 447
Table 8-21 on page 479
Table 8-23 on page 483
Table 8-25 on page 487
Table 8-26 on page 489
Table 8-24 on page 485
Table 8-21 on page 479
Table 8-21 on page 479
Table 8-20 on page 477
Table 8-15 on page 467
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-14 on page 465
502
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-28. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RH7-1490-000CN
RH7-1491-000CN
RH7-1494-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RH7-1607-000CN
RH7-5319-000CN
RS6-2510-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RS6-2537-000CN
RS7-0135-000CN
RS7-0136-020CN
RS7-0137-000CN
RS7-0138-000CN
RS7-0139-000CN
Fan, Cartridge
Fan, formatter
Motor, M7, developing disengaging stepping
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4650 Only
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V
Fan, lower (power supply fan) 4650 Only
Solenoid
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Spring tension
Cam/gear 66T
Gear 29T
Gear 200T (cyan and magenta)
Gear 200T (black and yellow)
Gear 17T
VD7-0644-001CN
VD7-1732-002CN
VD7-1838-001CN
VD7-2356-301CN
Fuse, 250 V, 4 Amp, 220 V
Fuse, 250 V, 20 Amp, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 8 Amp, 220 V
Fuse, 125 V, 6.3 Amp, 110 V
WC2-5452-000CN Switch, cassette paper size
WC2-5452-000CN Switch, push
WC4-5169-000CN Microswitch, front cover
WG8-5362-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1241
WG8-5362-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1241
WG8-5362-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1241
WG8-5362-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1241
WG8-5362-000CN Photo interrupter, TLP1241
WP2-5138-000CN
WS3-5746-000CN
Environment/humidity sensor 4650 Only
Connector, drawer
Table and page
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-13 on page 463
Table 8-14 on page 465
Table 8-17 on page 471
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-11 on page 459
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-9 on page 455
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-6 on page 449
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-8 on page 453
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-10 on page 457
Table 8-13 on page 463
Table 8-14 on page 465
Table 8-17 on page 471
Table 8-7 on page 451
Table 8-8 on page 453
Numerical parts list
503
504
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
cassette paper sensors, removing 233
paper size-detection operations 158
pickup/feed operations 144, 155
upper-cassette pickup assembly, removing 230
2 x 500-sheet paper feeders
cassette paper detection switch, removing 234
500-sheet paper feeder
pickup/feed operations 144, 153
A
ENWW
auxiliary connector, locating 10
B
bin
blank images, troubleshooting 346
blank spots, troubleshooting 350
C
cables
cartridges
status page, printing 361, 375
cassette. See Tray 2 catridges
Index
505
clearable warning messages 119, 245
CMYK sample page, printing 361, 382
color
sample pages, printing 361, 381
variation, troubleshooting 337
color registration detection assembly, part numbers
color registration detection unit, removing 183
color-plane registration calibration 140
commands 356 communications, troubleshooting 356
components
configuration page, printing 52, 373
configuration, DC controller 320
configuration, formatter 319 configuration, formatter and DC controller 319
connecting
control panel
error messages, 4600 (alphabetical 246
error messages, 4600 (numerical 282
error messages, 4650 (alphabetical 262
error messages, 4650 (numerical 300
506
Index
counts, page 368, 376, 403, 406
covers
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder, removing 226
D
dark print, troubleshooting 345
DC controller
PCA assembly, part numbers 453
default settings, restoring 367
developing cylinder operations 129
developing disengaging motor assembly, removing
developing disengaging rod, removing 185
development block operations 133 development operations 133
diagnostics
ENWW
DIMMs
verifying installation (4600) 96
dirty pages, troubleshooting 347
disengaging drive assembly
disengaging motor assembly, removing 192
disk
file directory, printing 361, 378
drivers
drum
image formation operations 131
rotation tracking operations 128
drum drive units, removing 185
drums
drive assemblies, part numbers 461
drive assembly, part numbers 449 ground assembly, part numbers 449
duplexer
E
EIO connections, locating 9, 10
ENWW
electrostatic-image formation block 131
embedded Web server
enabling DIMMs
engine control system operations 110
envelopes
environment sensor (4650)
environmental specifications 12, 15
error messages
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 160
ETB (transfer kit)
ETB assembly
F
factory settings, restoring 367
fans
Index
507
Fast InfraRed pod
file directory, printing 361, 378
FIR pod
flash memory card, installing (4650) 102
flowchart, troubleshooting 242
font DIMMs
formatter
frame type parameters, Novell NetWare 71
front cover
fuser
drive assembly, part numbers 455, 465
inlet paper sensor, removing 217
power supply, part numbers 445, 457
fuser kit
508
Index
G
glossy paper
gray settings
H
hard disk
file directory, printing 361, 378
heater temperature control 115
high-voltage contact blocks, removing 211
high-voltage power supply
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) 37
HP Jetdirect print servers
operating systems supported 58
HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh 64, 67
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program
HP Toolbox
humidity
environment sensor operations (4650) 111, 141
environmental specifications 12, 15
I
ENWW
image formation
image fuser kit. See fuser kit image quality, troubleshooting
color 337, 341, 344, 345, 346, 349
image stabilization control 141
image transfer kit. See transfer kit (ETB)
image-formation operations 124, 131
images
imaging drum. See drum
Information tab, embedded Web server 371
initializing
installation
HP Jetdirect print servers 105
Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) 37
internal components
ENWW
ISPE (Instant Support Professional Edition) 37
J
jams
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 329
500-sheet paper feeder 329, 331
print quality, troubleshooting 337
Jetdirect print servers
operating systems supported 58
K
L
languages, printer
laser beam exposure operations 132
laser statement for Finland 31
laser/scanner
LaserJet Utility, Macintosh 64, 67
Index
509
life expectancies, supplies 81
light print, troubleshooting 344
links, embedded Web server 372
locking control panel menus 76
low-voltage power supply
M
Macintosh
installing network software 67
media
size-detection operations 148, 158
troubleshooting print quality 335
media jams. See jams memory
510
Index
verifying installation (4600) 96
memory controller PCA, removing 194
memory-tag antenna PCAs, removing 191
menus, control panel
messages
misplaced images, troubleshooting 351
motors
developing disengaging, removing 192
multi-feeds, troubleshooting 333
multipurpose tray. See Tray 1
N
Networking tab, embedded Web server 371
networks
communications, troubleshooting 356
installing HP Jedtdirect print servers 105
installing Macintosh software 67
installing Windows software 66
operating systems supported 58
ENWW
nonvolatile memory
NVRAM
O
operating environment specifications 12, 15
operating systems supported 58, 62
operations
ETB (electrostatic transfer/transport belt) 130
heater temperature control 115
image stabilization control 141
image-formation system 124, 131
ordering parts and supplies 35, 434
output bin
ENWW output quality, troubleshooting
color 337, 341, 344, 345, 346, 349
overlay, control-panel 50, 437
P
page counts 368, 376, 403, 406
paper
size-detection operations 148, 158
troubleshooting, print quality 335
paper jams. See jams paper path
paper pickup assembly, part numbers 455, 469
paper pickup driver unit, removing 181
paper pickup rollers, removing
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 236
paper pickup sensor PCA, removing 179
paper pickup unit, removing 178
paper pickup-drive assembly, part numbers 459
Index
511
paper-size-detection switch, removing 195
parallel connection
part numbers
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 478
color registration detection assembly 455
control panel overlay and label 437
DC controller PCA assembly 453
disengaging drive assembly 463
drum drive assembly 449 drum ground assembly 449
paper pickup assembly 455, 469
paper pickup-drive assembly 459
parts
PCAs
PCL font lists, printing 361, 379
personalities
photographic drum. See drum
pickup rollers, removing
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 236
512
Index
ports
power
power assemblies
power supplies
power-on
PowerSave
pre-troubleshooting checklist 241
primary charging operations 132
primary exposure operations 131
print cartridges
status page, printing 361, 375
ENWW
print quality, troubleshooting
color 337, 341, 344, 345, 346, 349
printer drivers
printer languages
PS font lists, printing 361, 380
Q
quality, troubleshooting
color 337, 341, 344, 345, 346, 349
R
ENWW
repetitive defects, troubleshooting 352
replacement intervals, supplies 81
replacement parts configuration
configuration, replacement parts 319
replacing
RGB sample page, printing 361, 381
rollers
500-shet paper feeder, removing 224
image-formation operations 131
pickup/feed system operations 144
repetitive defects, troubleshooting 352
S
sensors
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder, testing 394
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder, removing 232
drum home-position, removing 188
environment (4650), operations 141
environment (4650), removing 185
fuser inlet paper, removing 217
image stabilization control 141
transparency detection (OHT) 148
separation pad, removing from Tray 1 181
Index
513
settings
Settings tab, embedded Web server 371
setup. See installation
size detection, paper 148, 158
size-detection switch, removing 195
skewed pages, troubleshooting 334
small-size paper detection 150
software
installing on Macintosh networks 67
installing on Windows 65, 66, 69
installing on Windows networks 66
solenoids
specifications
speed
static eliminator, part number 455
status and alerts software 372
status page, printing 361, 375
supplies
514
Index
status page, printing 361, 375
swatch book color matching 338
T
temperature
environment sensor operations (4650) 111, 141
environmental specifications 12, 15
tests
toner
toner cartridges. See print cartridges
toner-level detection
Toolbox. See HP Toolbox
top cover
transfer kit (ETB)
ENWW
transparencies
Tray 1
pickup roller and separation pad, removing 181
Tray 2
paper pickup roller, removing 180
paper size-detection operations 148
paper-size detection switch, removing 195
Tray 3. See 500-sheet paper feeder
Tray 3/4. See 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder troubleshooting
color 337, 341, 344, 345, 346, 349
error messages, 4600 (alphabetical) 246
error messages, 4600 (numerical) 282
error messages, 4650 (alphabetical) 262
error messages, 4650 (numerical) 300
U
UEL (universal exit language) 357
unlocking control panel menus 403
USB connection
V
voltage
W
warning messages, clearable 119, 245
warranty
Web sites
weight equivalence table, paper 24
Windows
installing network software 66
wrinkled pages, troubleshooting 333
ENWW Index
515
516
Index ENWW
© 2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, LP www.hp.com
*Q3668-90901*
*Q3668-90901*
Q3668-90901
advertisement
Key Features
- High-volume printing
- Wide range of paper handling options
- Parallel, USB, and network connectivity
- PowerSave
- Embedded Web server
- Variety of diagnostics tools
